Accpac - Guide - Manual For SM User Guide PDF

.
SAGE ACCPAC
Sage Accpac ERP
System Manager
User Guide
Sage Accpac International, Inc. Confidential

SM ttl UG.doc, printed on 4/6/2006, at 4:37:36 PM. Last saved on 4/6/2006 4:37:00 PM.
2006SageAccpacInternational,Inc.Allrightsreserved.
SageSoftware,SageSoftwarelogos,andallSageAccpacproductandservicenamesareregistered
trademarksortrademarksofSageAccpacInternational,Inc.,oritsaffiliatedentities.Allother
trademarksarethepropertyoftheirrespectiveowners.
SageAccpacInternational,Inc.
Publisher
Nopartofthisdocumentationmaybecopied,photocopied,reproduced,translated,microfilmed,
orotherwiseduplicatedonanymediumwithoutwrittenconsentofSageAccpacInternational,Inc.
UseofthesoftwareprogramsdescribedhereinandthisdocumentationissubjecttotheSage
SoftwareLicenseAgreementenclosedinthesoftwarepackage.

Formatted Sage Accpac Object EULA (Sept 8 05).doc, printed on 9/14/2005, at 4:27:01 PM. Last
saved on 9/14/2005 4:13:00 PM.
Sage Software
End User License Agreement for Indicated
Evaluation, Demonstration or Retail Software
THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT APPLIES TO THESE SAGE ACCPAC SOFTWARE PRODUCTS:
z
Sage Accpac 100 ERP z
Sage Pro 100 ERP z
ACCPAC VisionPoint
z
Sage Accpac Exchange z
ACCPAC Plus
z
Sage Accpac WMS z
BPI Accounting II
z
Sage Accpac Options z
Sage Accpac ePOS
IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY BEFORE YOU INSTALL OR USE THIS SOFTWARE: This End User License Agreement
(EULA) is a legal agreement between You (You and Your includes a person and/or an individual entity) and Sage Accpac
International, Inc. (Sage Accpac) concerning the specified evaluation, demonstration and/or retail software products(s) (hereinafter
respectively referred to as Evaluation Product, Demonstration Product and Retail Product; and collectively referred to as
Software). The Software includes all component parts, the associated media, any printed materials, any updates, and any online
or electronic documentation, as applicable. By accessing, installing, copying or otherwise using the Software, You agree to be bound
by the terms of this EULA. If You do not agree to the terms of this EULA, Sage Accpac is unwilling to license the Software to You. In
such event, You may not access, use or copy the Software, and You should promptly contact Sage Accpac for instructions on
returning the Software. WRITTEN ASSENT IS NOT A PREREQUISITE TO THE VALIDITY OR ENFORCEABILITY OF THIS EULA.
___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
1. License.
a. License Grant.
(i) Retail Product. If You licensed a Retail Product, subject to the payment of all applicable license fees, and the terms
and conditions of this EULA, Sage Accpac hereby grants to You a limited, non-sublicensable, non-exclusive, non-transferable right to
install and run one copy of the specified version of the Software and the accompanying documentation, solely for Your individual use.
This EULA authorizes You to make one copy of the Retail Product solely for backup or archival purposes, provided that the copy You
make contains all of the proprietary notices set forth in or on the original version of the Software.
(ii) Demonstration Product. If You licensed a Demonstration Product, subject to the payment of all applicable license
fees, and the terms and conditions of this EULA, Sage Accpac hereby grants to You a limited, non-sublicensable, non-exclusive, non-
transferable and revocable right to install and run copies of the Demonstration Product and the accompanying documentation, solely
on computer(s) owned or controlled exclusively by You, for Your individual use and for demonstration, marketing, promotional, end
user support, training and/or development purposes, each to the extent permitted and/or required under the applicable Sage Accpac
Solution Provider, Certified Consultant, Development Partner, Professional Accountant Recommender, Online Referral Partner,
Hosting Partner, Recognized Training Center, Distribution Agreement or other applicable agreements between You and Sage Accpac
(collectively the Other Sage Accpac Agreement). Use of the Demonstration Product is limited to not more than the number of
concurrent users and/or seats as specified in the Other Sage Accpac Agreement, multi-user license, product packaging or
accompanying documentation. This EULA authorizes You to make one copy of the Demonstration Product solely for backup or
archival purposes, provided that the copy You make contains all of the proprietary notices set forth in or on the original version of the
Software. You may have additional rights as may be set forth in the applicable Other Sage Accpac Agreement.
(iii) Evaluation Products. If You licensed an Evaluation Product, subject to the terms and conditions of this EULA, Sage
Accpac hereby grants to You a limited, non-sublicensable, non-exclusive, non-transferable and revocable right to install and run one
copy of the Evaluation Product and the accompanying documentation, solely for Your individual use for evaluation purposes.
(iv) All Software. Upon receipt of the appropriate Software registration information, Sage Accpac will provide You an
alphanumeric key (the Activation Code or PAC Code) to enable You to use the Software pursuant to the terms of this EULA.
Documentation shall include, but not be limited to, any printed materials, online or electronic data provided by or obtained from Sage
Accpac with regard to this Software (Documentation). The Software and Documentation are licensed, not sold. Even though
copies of the Software may be provided on media of different formats, copies of the Software on different media formats do not
constitute multiple licenses to the Software. If the Software is licensed as a suite or bundle with more than one specified Software
product, this EULA applies to all such specified Software products, subject to any restrictions or usage terms specified on the
applicable product packaging or accompanying documentation that applies to any of such Software products individually.
b. Single-User. If this Software is licensed as a single user product, You may use only one copy of the Software, by not
more than one user at a time, on a total of one computer or workstation, or personal digital assistant, or pager, or smart phone, or
one such other electronic device for which the Software was designed (Client Device), unless otherwise set forth herein. The
component parts of the Software may not be used individually or jointly in full or in part on more than one Client Device, unless
otherwise set forth herein. The Software is in use on a computer when it is loaded into the temporary memory (i.e., random-access
memory or RAM) of that Client Device.
c. Multi-User. If the Software is licensed with multi-user or networked license terms, You may use the Software on one
server computer, or a greater number as specified in the applicable multi-user license, product packaging or accompanying
documentation, within a multi-user or networked environment for connecting, directly or indirectly, to not more than the maximum
number of Client Devices, concurrent users and/or seats, as specified in the applicable multi-user license, product packaging or
accompanying documentation. Use of software, hardware or services that bypass any Software license restrictions and/or reduce the
number of Client Devices, concurrent users and/or seats, as may be applicable, accessing or utilizing the Software (e.g.,
multiplexing, pooling, or third party add on software or hardware) expressly does not reduce the number of licenses required (i.e.,
the required number of licenses would equal the number of distinct inputs to the multiplexing or pooling software or hardware front
end). If the number of Client Devices, concurrent users and/or seats that can potentially connect to the Software exceeds or has the
potential to exceed the number of licenses You have obtained, then You must have a reasonable self-enforcing automatic
Sage Accpac International, Inc.

saved on 9/14/2005 4:13:00 PM.
mechanism in place to ensure that Your use of the Software does not exceed the use limits specified for the license You have
obtained.
2. Term. Regardless of the location of the Software, You are responsible for strict compliance with any and all of the terms and
conditions of this EULA. This EULA will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with any of the limitations or other requirements
described herein, and such termination shall be in addition to and not in lieu of any criminal, civil or other remedies available to Sage
Accpac. When this EULA terminates, You must immediately cease using the Software and destroy all copies of the Software and the
Documentation. You may terminate this EULA at any point by destroying all copies of the Software and the Documentation.
a. Retail Product. If You licensed a Retail Product, this EULA is effective unless and until You or Sage Accpac terminates
the EULA earlier, in accordance with the terms set forth herein.
b. Demonstration Product. If You licensed a Demonstration Product, this EULA is effective unless and until You or Sage
Accpac terminates the EULA earlier, in accordance with the terms set forth herein or the terms set forth in Your Other Sage Accpac
Agreement or upon the earlier termination or expiration of Your Other Sage Accpac Agreement.
c. Evaluation Product. If You licensed an Evaluation Product, this EULA is effective for a period commencing on the earliest
date this Evaluation Software is downloaded, installed or first run and thereafter continuing for the period specified in the product
packaging or accompanying documentation, unless sooner terminated by You or Sage Accpac in accordance with the terms set forth
herein, but in no event shall such term exceed one hundred and eighty (180) days.
3. Updates. Sage Accpac may, at its sole discretion, make bug fixes, updates and/or service packs available. Sage Accpacs
maintenance service, if applicable and offered, is available for Retail Product at an additional cost to You, as Licensee, under a
separate written agreement. Sage Accpacs maintenance service is not available for Evaluation Product.
4. Ownership Rights.
a. Ownership of Software. The Software and Documentation are protected by United States patent, copyright laws and
other intellectual property laws, and international treaty provisions. Sage Accpac and its third party licensors, if any, retain all title to
and, except as expressly and unambiguously licensed herein, all rights and interest in (a) the Software, including, but not limited to, all
copies, versions, customizations, compilations and derivative works thereof (by whomever produced) and all related Documentation;
(b) the Sage Accpac trademarks, service marks, trade names, icons and logos; (c) any and all copyright rights, patent rights, trade
secret rights and other intellectual property and proprietary rights throughout the world in the foregoing; and (d) all Confidential
Information (as defined in Section 13 below). You acknowledge that Your possession, installation, or use of the Software does not
transfer to You any ownership, title, or registrable interest of any kind to the intellectual property in the Software, and that You will not
acquire any rights to the Software except as expressly set forth in this EULA. You agree that all backup, archival, or any other type of
copies of the Software and Documentation will contain the same proprietary notices that appear on and in the Software and
Documentation.
b. Submissions. Should You decide to submit any materials to Sage Accpac via electronic mail, through or to Sage Accpac
website(s), or otherwise, whether as feedback, data, questions, comments, ideas, concepts, techniques, suggestions or the like, You
agree that such submissions are unrestricted and shall be deemed non-confidential upon submission. You grant to Sage Accpac and
its assigns a non-exclusive, royalty-free, worldwide, perpetual, irrevocable license, with the right to sublicense, to use, copy, transmit,
distribute, create derivative works of, commercialize, display and perform such submissions.
5. Restrictions. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, loan, sell, distribute, market or commercialize any portion of the Software or
its components. You may only install and use the Software (a) on hardware which is under Your exclusive control and, in the case of
hardware performing any server functions, located at premises where You normally conduct day-to-day business operations; (b) on
server hardware located at premises under the exclusive or primary control of an authorized Sage Accpac Hosting Partner or its
agent; or (c) on a server not owned by You if You will be the only party with access to the Software on such server. You may not
permit any parent, affiliate, subsidiary or any other third parties to benefit from the use or functionality of the Software, either directly
or via a facility management, timesharing, service bureau or any other arrangement; provided, however, that You may use the
Software, as provided herein, to process the data of an affiliate or subsidiary of which You own more than fifty percent (50%);
provided, however, You may not exceed the number of datasets specified on the applicable product packaging or accompanying
documentation. You may not use the Software as part of a facility management, timesharing, or service bureau arrangement. You
may not transfer any or all of the rights granted to You under this EULA. To the maximum extent this restriction is permitted under
applicable law, You may not rename files of, modify, translate, localize, decompile, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer, attempt
to derive source code from, remove any proprietary notices from, or create derivative works based upon the Software, in whole or in
part. You may not duplicate or copy any portion of the Software or Documentation, unless otherwise set forth herein. You may not
remove any proprietary notices or labels on the Software, including, but not limited to, the Sage Accpac and product names wherever
they may appear. All rights not expressly set forth hereunder are reserved by Sage Accpac. Sage Accpac reserves the right to
periodically conduct audits upon advance written notice to verify compliance with the terms of this EULA.
6. Warranty and Disclaimer.
a. Limited Warranty. Sage Accpac warrants that for ninety (90) days from the date of original purchase the media on which
the Software is contained will be free from defects in materials and workmanship.
b. Customer Remedies. Sage Accpacs entire liability and Your exclusive remedy shall be replacement of the defective
media. To receive replacement of defective media, You must receive a return authorization number from Sage Accpac and return the
defective media to Sage Accpac at Your expense with a copy of Your receipt. This limited warranty is void if the defect has resulted
from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement media will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period.
This remedy is not available to the extent it is prohibited under United States export control laws and regulations.
c. Warranty Disclaimer. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND EXCEPT FOR THE
LIMITED WARRANTY SET FORTH HEREIN, THE SOFTWARE (AND ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION) IS PROVIDED ON
AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING
PROVISIONS, YOU ASSUME SOLE RESPONSIBILITY FOR SELECTING THE SOFTWARE TO ACHIEVE YOUR INTENDED
RESULTS, AND SOLE RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE INSTALLATION OF, USE OF, AND RESULTS OBTAINED FROM THE

saved on 9/14/2005 4:13:00 PM.
SOFTWARE. WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING PROVISIONS, SAGE ACCPAC MAKES NO WARRANTY THAT THE
SOFTWARE WILL BE ERROR-FREE, VIRUS FREE, OR FREE FROM INTERRUPTIONS OR OTHER FAILURES OR THAT THE
SOFTWARE WILL SATISFY YOUR SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE
LAW, SAGE ACCPAC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY (IF ANY) IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF LACK OF VIRUSES, OF LACK OF ACCURACY OR COMPLETENESS OF
RESPONSES, OF RESULTS, AND LACK OF NEGLIGENCE OR LACK OF WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, ALL WITH REGARD TO
THE SOFTWARE AND ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTATION. THERE IS NO WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF TITLE, QUIET
ENJOYMENT, QUIET POSSESSION, CORRESPONDENCE TO DESCRIPTION, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT WITH REGARD TO
THE SOFTWARE. THE ENTIRE RISK OF THE QUALITY OF OR ARISING OUT OF USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE, IF ANY, REMAINS SOLELY WITH YOU. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS
ON IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THE FOREGOING PROVISIONS
SHALL BE ENFORCEABLE TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
d. Indemnification. You agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Sage Accpac and its directors, officers, employees,
affiliates, sublicensees, and agents from and against all claims, defense costs (including reasonable expert and attorneys fees),
judgments and other expenses arising out of or on account of any negligent act, omission, or willful misconduct by You or on Your
behalf in (i) the installation or use of the Software or (ii) your compliance or failure to comply with this EULA.
e. Data. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT ANY DATA ENTRY, CONVERSION OR STORAGE IS SUBJECT TO THE
LIKELIHOOD OF HUMAN AND MACHINE ERRORS, MALICIOUS MANIPULATION, OMISSIONS, DELAYS, AND LOSSES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, INADVERTENT LOSS OF DATA OR DAMAGE TO MEDIA THAT MAY RESULT IN LOSS
OR DAMAGE TO YOU AND/OR YOUR PROPERTY, AND/OR YOUR DETRIMENTAL RELIANCE ON MALICIOUSLY
MANIPULATED DATA. SAGE ACCPAC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SUCH ERRORS, OMISSIONS, DELAYS, OR
LOSSES. YOU ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR ADOPTING REASONABLE MEASURES TO LIMIT THE IMPACT OF SUCH
PROBLEMS, INCLUDING BACKING UP DATA, ADOPTING PROCEDURES TO ENSURE THE ACCURACY OF INPUT DATA,
EXAMINING AND CONFIRMING RESULTS PRIOR TO USE, ADOPTING PROCEDURES TO IDENTIFY AND CORRECT
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS, REPLACING LOST OR DAMAGED MEDIA, AND RECONSTRUCTING DATA. YOU ARE ALSO
RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLYING WITH ALL LOCAL, STATE, AND FEDERAL LAWS PERTAINING TO THE USE AND
DISCLOSURE OF ANY DATA. IF YOU LICENSED AN EVALUATION PRODUCT, YOU ACKNOWLEDGE AND UNDERSTAND (I)
THAT THE EVALUATION PRODUCT MAY BE USED FOR EVALUATION PURPOSES ONLY, (II) THAT THE EVALUATION
PRODUCT SHALL BE OPERABLE ONLY FOR A LIMITED TIME AND (III) THAT, UPON EXPIRATION OF THE EVALUATION
PERIOD, ANY DATA OR OTHER INFORMATION USED WITH, PROCESSED BY AND/OR STORED IN CONJUNCTION WITH
THE EVALUATION PRODUCT MAY BE IRRETRIEVABLE, UNRECOVERABLE AND/OR OTHERWISE UNUSABLE.
f. Authorized Sage Accpac Solution Providers and Certified Consultants. ANY AUTHORIZED SAGE ACCPAC
SOLUTION PROVIDER, CERTIFIED CONSULTANT, RESELLER, INSTALLER OR CONSULTANT IS NOT AFFILIATED WITH
SAGE ACCPAC IN ANY CAPACITY OTHER THAN AS A RESELLER, INSTALLER OR CONSULTANT OF SAGE ACCPACS
PRODUCTS AND HAS NO AUTHORITY TO BIND SAGE ACCPAC OR MODIFY ANY LICENSE OR WARRANTY. SAGE
ACCPAC MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTY, ENDORSEMENT OR GUARANTEE WITH RESPECT TO THE
SKILLS OR QUALIFICATIONS OF ANY AUTHORIZED SAGE ACCPAC SOLUTION PROVIDER, CERTIFIED CONSULTANT,
RESELLER, INSTALLER OR CONSULTANT AND YOU ARE ENCOURAGED TO INDEPENDENTLY INVESTIGATE THE SKILLS
AND QUALIFICATIONS OF ANY AUTHORIZED SAGE ACCPAC SOLUTION PROVIDER, CERTIFIED CONSULTANT,
RESELLER, INSTALLER OR CONSULTANT WITH WHOM YOU ASSOCIATE.
7. Limitation of Liability. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER IN TORT,
CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL SAGE ACCPAC BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY FOR
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER WHATSOEVER
(INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF GOODWILL, LOSS OF CONFIDENTIAL
OR OTHER INFORMATION, FOR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION,
FOR PERSONAL INJURY, LOSS OF PRIVACY, FOR FAILURE TO MEET ANY DUTY INCLUDING A DUTY OF GOOD FAITH OR
OF REASONABLE CARE, FOR NEGLIGENCE (WHETHER ACTIVE OR PASSIVE), AND FOR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY OR
OTHER LOSS WHATSOEVER) ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE, OR OTHERWISE UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS EULA, EVEN IN THE EVENT OF
FAULT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, AND GROSS NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH OF CONTRACT, OR
BREACH OF WARRANTY BY SAGE ACCPAC, AND EVEN IF SAGE ACCPAC HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT WILL SAGE ACCPAC BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE LIST PRICE
SAGE ACCPAC CHARGES FOR A LICENSE TO THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO
LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY TO THE EXTENT THAT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION.
FURTHERMORE, SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS LIMITATION AND EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THE FOREGOING
PROVISIONS SHALL BE ENFORCEABLE TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
8. Entire Agreement. This EULA expressly supersedes and completely replaces any and all prior end user license agreements.
Sage Accpac shall not be bound by or liable to You for any pre-existing or contemporaneous written or oral representations or
warranties, made by anyone, with respect to the Software Product, including any authorized Solution Provider, Certified Consultant,
distributor or reseller or their respective agents, employees, or representatives, nor shall You be deemed a third party beneficiary of
any obligations of Sage Accpac to any such Solution Provider, Certified Consultant, distributor or reseller.
9. Severability. If any provision of this EULA is held to be unenforceable, the enforceability of the remaining provisions shall in no
way be affected or impaired thereby.
10. United States Government. The Software and accompanying Documentation are deemed to be commercial computer
software and commercial computer software documentation, respectively, pursuant to DFAR Section 227.7202 and FAR Section
12.212, as applicable. Any use, modification, reproduction, release, performance, display or disclosure of the Software and

saved on 9/14/2005 4:13:00 PM.
accompanying Documentation by the United States Government shall be governed solely by the terms of this EULA and shall be
prohibited except to the extent expressly permitted by the terms of this EULA.
11. Export Controls. You acknowledge that the Software may be subject to export controls imposed by U.S. laws and regulations.
During the term of this EULA, You agree to comply with the U.S. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act and with all export laws and
restrictions and regulations of the United States Department of Commerce, U.S. Department of the Treasury or other United States or
foreign agency or authority, and not to knowingly export, re-export, download, or allow the export, re-export or downloading of the
Software or Documentation and any underlying information or technology in violation of any such restrictions, laws or regulations. By
accessing, installing, downloading or using the Software You are agreeing to the foregoing and You are certifying that You are not
located in, under the control of, or a national or resident of any country to which the export of the Software is prohibited.
EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE MAY BE SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH THE RULES AND REGULATIONS PROMULGATED
FROM TIME TO TIME BY THE BUREAU OF INDUSTRY AND SECURITY, UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE,
WHICH RESTRICT THE EXPORT AND RE-EXPORT OF CERTAIN PRODUCTS AND TECHNICAL DATA. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE
AND AGREE THAT IF THE EXPORT OF THE SOFTWARE IS CONTROLLED UNDER SUCH RULES AND REGULATIONS, THEN
YOU SHALL NOT CAUSE THE SOFTWARE TO BE EXPORTED OR RE-EXPORTED, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, (A) WITHOUT
ALL EXPORT OR RE-EXPORT LICENSES AND UNITED STATES OR OTHER GOVERNMENTAL APPROVALS REQUIRED BY
ANY APPLICABLE LAWS, OR (B) IN VIOLATION OF ANY APPLICABLE PROHIBITION AGAINST THE EXPORT OR RE-EXPORT
OF ANY PART OF THE SOFTWARE. SOME COUNTRIES HAVE RESTRICTIONS ON THE USE OF ENCRYPTION WITHIN
THEIR BORDERS, OR THE IMPORT OR EXPORT OF ENCRYPTION EVEN IF FOR ONLY TEMPORARY PERSONAL OR
BUSINESS USE. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE IMPLEMENTATION AND ENFORCEMENT OF THESE LAWS IS NOT
ALWAYS CONSISTENT AS TO SPECIFIC COUNTRIES. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT IT IS YOUR ULTIMATE RESPONSIBILITY
TO COMPLY WITH ANY AND ALL GOVERNMENT EXPORT AND OTHER APPLICABLE LAWS AND THAT SAGE ACCPAC HAS
NO FURTHER RESPONSIBILITY AFTER THE INITIAL LICENSE TO YOU WITHIN THE ORIGINAL COUNTRY OF LICENSE.
12. High Risk Activities. The Software is not fault-tolerant and is not designed or intended for use in hazardous environments
requiring fail-safe performance, including without limitation, in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication
systems, air traffic control, weapons systems, direct life-support machines, or any other application in which the failure of the Software
could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or property damage (collectively, High Risk Activities). Sage Accpac
expressly disclaims any express or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities.
13. Confidentiality. You agree that the Software, including, but not limited to, all source and object code components, screen shots
and displays, graphical user interfaces, algorithms, formulae, data structures, scripts, application programming interfaces and
protocols, and the Documentation (collectively the Confidential Information) are trade secrets of Sage Accpac and are owned by
Sage Accpac or, where applicable, its third-party licensors. You agree to retain all Confidential Information in strict confidence at
least with the same amount of diligence that You exercise in preserving the secrecy of Your most-valuable information, but in no
event less than reasonable diligence. You agree to: (i) only disclose Confidential Information to Your employees and agents to the
extent required to use the Software under the terms of this EULA and not to disclose or disseminate the Confidential Information to
any third party without the prior written consent of Sage Accpac, (ii) use the Confidential Information solely for Your benefit as
provided for herein and not to allow any third party to benefit from the Confidential Information, and (iii) bind Your employees and
agents, by terms no less restrictive than those set forth herein, to maintain the confidentiality of such Confidential Information, and not
use or disclose such information except as permitted under this EULA. Notwithstanding the disclosure of any Confidential Information
for any reason, such Confidential Information shall continue to be owned by Sage Accpac or its licensors. Nothing contained herein
shall be deemed to prevent You from disclosing or disseminating Your data, in any format or any report, to whomever You so choose.
Notwithstanding anything else to the contrary in this Section 13, and only with respect to Demonstration Product, You are permitted to
use the Demonstration Product to demonstrate and promote the functionality and benefits of the Product.
14. Miscellaneous. This EULA is exclusively governed by the laws of the United States and the State of California, without
reference to conflicts of law principles. In the event of a dispute or legal action between the parties, they agree to waive any
objections to personal jurisdiction, and agree to service of process and exclusive venue in the Federal District Court for Northern
California or the California Superior Court of Alameda County. The application of the United Nations Convention of Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded. This EULA sets forth all of Your rights and is the entire agreement between the
parties. This EULA supersedes any other communications with respect to the Software and/or Documentation. This EULA may not
be modified except by a written addendum issued by a duly authorized representative of Sage Accpac. No provision hereof shall be
deemed waived unless such waiver shall be in writing and signed by a duly authorized representative of Sage Accpac. You hereby
acknowledge a breach of this EULA would cause irreparable harm and significant injury to Sage Accpac that may be difficult to
ascertain and that a remedy at law would be inadequate. You agree that Sage Accpac shall have the right to seek and obtain
immediate injunctive relief to enforce the obligations under this EULA in addition to any other rights and remedies it may have. If any
provision of this EULA is held invalid, the remainder of this EULA shall continue in full force and effect. The controlling language of
this EULA is English. If You have received a translation into another language, it has been provided for Your convenience only.
15. Sage Accpac Customer Contact. If You have any questions concerning these terms and conditions, or if You would like to
contact Sage Accpac for any other reason, please call (925) 461-2625, or write to us at: Sage Accpac International, Inc., 6700 Koll
Center Parkway, Third Floor, Pleasanton, California 94566, USA. You may also find us on the Web at http://www.accpac.com or
http://www.accpaconline.com.

Smug54-toc.doc, printed on 4/25/2006, at 2:42:48 PM. Last saved on 4/25/2006 2:42:00 PM.
Contents
Chapter 1 Introducing the User Guide

How to Use This Manual ........................................................ 11
Other System Manager Guides .................................................. 13
Administrator Guide........................................................ 13
Tax and Bank User Guide ................................................... 13
Other Sage Accpac ERP Manuals ............................................. 13
Chapter 2: Starting Sage Accpac ERP

Signing On to Sage Accpac ERP on the Desktop ................................... 22
Signing On to Sage Accpac ERP from a Web Browser .............................. 25
Closing the Company Database from your Browser ............................ 27
System Manager Services ....................................................... 28
Starting an Application ......................................................... 28
Opening Sage Accpac ERP in the Sage Desktop ................................... 29
Moving Around on the Sage Desktop........................................ 210
Using the Tasks Pane ...................................................... 211
Using the My Tasks Pane ................................................... 214
Using the Content Pane .................................................... 216
Changing Companies .......................................................... 219
Changing Companies on the Desktop ....................................... 220
Changing Companies in a Web Browser ..................................... 220
Changing Passwords .......................................................... 221
Where To Now? ............................................................... 221
User Guide iii
ACCPAC INTERNATIONAL Confidential

Chapter 3: Learning the Basics

Changing Icon Display ......................................................... 32
Working with Records ......................................................... 32
Moving Around in Sage Accpac ERP ......................................... 33
Displaying Data ........................................................... 34
Using the Calculator ........................................................... 35
Calculator Chart ........................................................... 35
Entering Dates Using the Drop-Down Calendar .................................. 36
Getting Help .................................................................. 37
Using Sage Accpac ERP Menu Commands ....................................... 37
File Menu ..................................................................... 37
Object Menu .................................................................. 37
View Menu ................................................................... 38
Macro Menu .................................................................. 39
Help Menu .................................................................... 39
Help Topics .............................................................. 310
Whats This? .............................................................. 310
Sage Accpac ERP on the Web............................................... 310
System Information ....................................................... 310
About Sage Accpac ERP ................................................... 311
Online Documentation .................................................... 315
The Finder .................................................................... 41
Viewing Data in the Finder ..................................................... 43
Restricting the Choice of Records in the Finder ................................... 44
Changing Color in the Finder ................................................... 45
Setting Up Criteria for Selecting Records ......................................... 46
Clearing Criteria by Restoring Defaults ......................................... 410
Setting Properties ............................................................. 411
iv Sage Accpac System Manager

Chapter 5: Customizing Your Desktop

Creating a New Folder .......................................................... 51
Adding a Macro to a Folder ..................................................... 53
Adding a Report to a Folder ..................................................... 55
Adding a Non-Sage Accpac ERP Macro to a Folder ................................ 56
Copying Items to Another Folder ................................................ 59
Deleting a Folder ............................................................... 59
Changing Properties ........................................................... 510
Changing Preferences.......................................................... 511
Restoring Defaults ............................................................. 511
Chapter 6: Editing the Company Profile

Updating the Company Profile .................................................. 61
Tips ....................................................................... 61
How to Use ................................................................ 62
Chapter 7: Using the Fiscal Calendar

Setting Up the Fiscal Calendar ................................................... 71
Maintaining the Fiscal Calendar ................................................. 72
Tips ....................................................................... 72
How to Use ................................................................ 73
Chapter 8: Entering Currency Information

Currency Information .......................................................... 82
Maintaining Currency Codes .................................................... 82
How to Add, Delete, or Edit Currencies....................................... 83
Maintaining Currency Rate Types ............................................... 86
Before Using ............................................................... 86
How to Use ................................................................ 86
User Guide v

Entering Currency Rates and Tables ............................................. 87

Before Using............................................................... 87
Using Currency Rates ...................................................... 88
Creating Currency Tables ................................................... 89
Viewing Euro Conversion Rates ................................................ 813
Chapter 9: Setting Up Optional Fields

Setting Up Optional Fields in Common Services .................................. 92
Using Optional Tables With Older Sage Accpac Applications ...................... 94
Before Adding Optional Tables .............................................. 95
Adding, Editing, and Deleting Optional Tables ............................... 96
After Adding Optional Tables ............................................... 97
Chapter 10: Printing

Selecting Your Print Destination................................................ 101
Selecting Your Printer and Print Options ........................................ 104
Selecting a Printer and Print Options for a Specific Report..................... 106
Selecting a Printer and Print Options at the Time of Printing .................. 107
Standard Reports and Business Forms .......................................... 107
Administrative Services Reports ............................................... 108
Assign UI Profiles ......................................................... 108
Customization Directories ................................................. 108
Restart Maintenance ....................................................... 108
Security Groups........................................................... 108
UI Profile Maintenance Report ............................................. 109
User Authorizations Report ................................................ 109
Users Report ............................................................. 109
Common Services Reports ..................................................... 109
Company Profile .......................................................... 109
Fiscal Calendar ........................................................... 109
Currency Codes.......................................................... 1010
vi Sage Accpac System Manager

Currency Rates ...........................................................1010

Currency Rate Types ......................................................1010
Euro Conversion Rates ....................................................1010
Schedules ................................................................1010
Optional Fields ...........................................................1010
Optional Fields Conversion Listing .........................................1011
Bank and Tax Reports ........................................................1011
Chapter 11: Checking Data Integrity and Making

Backups
Checking Data Integrity........................................................ 112
Correcting Data Integrity Errors ............................................ 113
Backing Up Data .............................................................. 115
Sample Backup Schedule ................................................... 116
Chapter 12: Importing and Exporting Data

Data Records ................................................................. 122
Title Records .............................................................. 122
Printing Field Names ...................................................... 122
Using Sample Data ............................................................ 122
Importing Data into Sage Accpac ERP ........................................... 123
Exporting Data From Sage Accpac ERP .......................................... 125
Exporting to an ODBC Database ............................................ 128
Exporting in XML Format .................................................1216
Using Scripts ................................................................1219
Setting Criteria When Exporting Data ..........................................1220
Viewing Exported Files .......................................................1223
Viewing Data Exported to Excel............................................1223
Viewing Data Exported to a CSV File .......................................1223
Viewing Files Exported to Access ..........................................1224
Viewing Data Exported to XML ............................................1225
User Guide vii

Chapter 13: Using Macros

What is a Macro? ............................................................. 131
Setting Security Levels for Macros .............................................. 132
Creating Macros .............................................................. 134
Recording a Macro ........................................................ 134
Before You Start Writing a Visual Basic Macro ................................... 136
Sage Accpac ERP Application Components .................................. 136
View Objects and Database Commands ..................................... 138
Commands for Reading and Updating View Classes ........................ 1311
Filter Expressions in Browse .............................................. 1315
xxRPT.INI for Report Information ......................................... 1318
Running a Macro ............................................................ 1319
Adding Macro Icons to Your Desktop ...................................... 1322
Editing a Macro ............................................................. 1325
Editing Visual Basic Macros ............................................... 1325
Getting UI and View Information with U.I. Info................................. 1326
Creating Dialog Boxes ........................................................ 1329
Chapter 14: Writing Visual Basic Macros

Digitally Signing Macros ...................................................... 141
What is the Sage Accpac Object Model? ......................................... 143
Using Sage Accpac Objects .................................................... 144
Error Handling ............................................................... 147
Terminology Used in This Chapter ............................................. 147
Examples of Visual Basic Macros that Use Sage Accpac Objects.................... 148
The Sage Accpac Objects ..................................................... 1414
AccpacApplication ........................................................... 1415
AccpacCompany ............................................................ 1416
AccpacCurrency ............................................................. 1419
AccpacCurrencyRate ......................................................... 1421
AccpacCurrencyTable ........................................................ 1422
viii Sage Accpac System Manager

AccpacDBLink ...............................................................1424
AccpacFiscalCalendar ........................................................1431
AccpacMultiuser .............................................................1437
AccpacOrganization ..........................................................1443
AccpacPrintSetup ............................................................1444
AccpacProperty ..............................................................1445
AccpacReport ................................................................1448
AccpacSession ...............................................................1454
AccpacView .................................................................1483
AccpacViewField.............................................................1496
AccpacViewKey............................................................ 14101
Collections ................................................................ 14102
AccpacActiveApp (Collection) ............................................... 14102
AccpacErrors (Collection) ................................................... 14103
AccpacOrganizations (Collection) ............................................ 14107
AccpacViewCompositeNames (Collection) ................................... 14110
AccpacViewFieldPresentsStrings (Collection) ................................. 14111
AccpacViewFields (Collection) .............................................. 14113
AccpacViewKeys (Collection) ............................................... 14114
Chapter 15: Scheduling Recurring Transactions

Creating Schedules ............................................................ 151
Schedule Details Window .................................................. 155
Reminder List ................................................................. 156
Processing Schedules ...................................................... 158
Appendix A: Error Messages

Criteria error.................................................................. A1
Damaged data ................................................................ A2
Import/export file problem ..................................................... A6
Incorrect procedure............................................................ A7
User Guide ix

Insufficient disk space ..........................................................A8

Insufficient memory ...........................................................A9
Internal error ................................................................ A10
Invalid input ................................................................ A12
Operating system limit reached ............................................... A13
Password change is required .................................................. A14
Program file problem ........................................................ A14
System error ................................................................ A16
System file problem .......................................................... A17
System limit reached ......................................................... A18
Appendix B: Using a Mouse or Keyboard

Using Function Keys ........................................................... B1
Using Menu Commands and Buttons ............................................ B1
Moving Around in Data Entry Forms ............................................ B2
Working with Columns of Data ................................................. B2
Moving Within Columns ................................................... B2
Changing Columns in Data Entry Forms ..................................... B3
Index
x Sage Accpac System Manager

Smug54-1.doc, printed on 4/3/2006, at 4:54:38 PM. Last saved on 4/3/2006 2:33:00 PM.
the User Guide

Introducing
Chapter 1
Introducing the User Guide
This chapter introduces you to the System Manager User Guide, which
contains information about the day-to-day operations of the Sage
Accpac ERP System Manager.
How to Use This Manual

In addition to Chapter 1, the following chapters are included in the
System Manager User Guide:
Chapter 2, Starting Sage Accpac ERP, explains how to sign on,

start applications, and change passwords and companies, from both
the desktop and a Web browser.
Chapter 3, Learning the Basics, describes techniques for using

Sage Accpac, including options, commands, and the calculator.
Chapter 4, Using the Finder, explains how to use the Finder for
faster, more efficient data lookup in Sage Accpac ERP.
Chapter 5, Customizing Your Desktop, explains how to create

your own folders containing macros, reports, accounting programs,
and other DOS or Windows programs that you use on a day-to-day
basis.
Chapter 6, Editing the Company Profile, describes changes you

can make to a company profile.
Chapter 7, Using the Fiscal Calendar, describes the fiscal calendar

that you maintain for your company.
Chapter 8, Entering Currency Information, describes the currency

information you need to enter for single or multicurrency
accounting, and discusses euro conversion rates.
User Guide 11

How to Use This Manual
Chapter 9, Setting Up Optional Fields, gives instructions for

defining additional data of your choice for your accounting
applications.
Chapter 10, Printing, gives instructions for printing, and provides

overviews of Administrative Services and Common Services reports.
Chapter 11, Checking Data Integrity and Making Backups,

explains how to check the integrity and make backup copies of your
accounting data.
Chapter 12, Importing and Exporting Data, explains how to

import and export data in Sage Accpac ERP, and describes the
format in which the data must be organized.
Chapter 13, Using Macros, provides an overview of Visual Basic

macros. The chapter describes how to create, edit, and run macros,
and provides an overview of view objects and filters used with
macros.
Chapter 14, Writing Visual Basic Macros, describes the Sage

Accpac ERP objects you can use when writing macros in the Visual
Basic programming language.
Chapter 15, Scheduling Recurring Transactions, gives

instructions for setting up the feature in Common Services that
allows users to schedule recurring transactions.
Appendix A, Error Messages, provides instructions for recovering

from error conditions.
Appendix B, Using a Mouse or Keyboard, describes techniques

for selecting options, working with records, forms, and columns of
data, and using a mouse and keyboard.
The Index contains an alphabetical listing of topics in the System

Manager User Guide.
12 Sage Accpac System Manager

the User Guide

Introducing
Other System Manager Guides
Other System Manager Guides

The System Manager package also contains the System Manager
Administrator Guide and the Tax and Bank User Guide.
Administrator Guide
The System Manager Administrator Guide introduces the System
Manager, and gives instructions for installing and setting up Sage
Accpac ERP programs.
Tax and Bank User Guide

The System Manager Tax and Bank User Guide introduces you to the
tax and bank services, and explains how to set them up and use
them with Sage Accpac ERP applications.
Other Sage Accpac ERP Manuals

Each Sage Accpac ERP application is shipped with a guide that
describes application options and how to get started, and a guide
that details the various tasks the application performs.
User Guide 13

Chapter 2
Starting Sage Accpac ERP
Sage Accpac
Starting
Signing On to Sage Accpac ERP on the Desktop ................................... 22
Signing On to Sage Accpac ERP from a Web Browser .............................. 25
Closing the Company Database from your Browser ............................ 27
System Manager Services ....................................................... 28
Starting an Application ......................................................... 28
Opening Sage Accpac ERP in the Sage Desktop ................................... 29
Moving Around on the Sage Desktop........................................ 210
Using the Tasks Pane ...................................................... 211
Using the My Tasks Pane ................................................... 214
Moving and Deleting Tasks and Groups in the My Tasks Pane ............. 216
Using the Content Pane .................................................... 216
Changing the Current Home Page ....................................... 217
Adding More Than One Web Site ....................................... 218
Changing Companies .......................................................... 219
Changing Companies on the Desktop ....................................... 220
Changing Companies in a Web Browser ..................................... 220
Changing Passwords .......................................................... 221
Where To Now? ............................................................... 221
User Guide 2i
Sage Accpac INTERNATIONAL Confidential


Chapter 2
Starting Sage Accpac ERP
Sage Accpac
Starting
This chapter gives instructions for signing on to Sage Accpac ERP
and starting applications on the company desktop or from a Web
browser, explains how to change your password at sign-on, and how
to switch companies without leaving Sage Accpac ERP.
Windows terms We assume that you are already familiar with Windows terms such
as icon, application, window, click, double-click, select, choose,
menu, command, insertion point, and dialog box. If you are
relatively new to Windows, you may wish to review your Microsoft
Windows Users Guide before you begin.
Opening Sage You can open and use your Sage Accpac ERP company database
Accpac ERP from
from a Web browser. Please see the section, Signing On to Sage
a Web browser
Accpac ERP from a Web Browser, later in this chapter.
Help If you need help while you use Sage Accpac ERP, do one of the
following:
Press F1 to see Help for your current position.
Choose a command from the Help menu.
Choose the Help button, if one is displayed.
Highlight a command in the menu bar, then press F1 for

information about that command.
User Guide 21

Signing On to Sage Accpac ERP on the Desktop
Overview The following diagram is an overview of starting Sage Accpac ERP.

The process is described in this chapter.
Company
Sign-on Desktop
Start
Common Administrative General Accounts Accounts

Services Services Ledger Receivable Payable

To sign on to Sage Accpac ERP from a Web browser, see the next
section, Signing on to Sage Accpac ERP from a Web Browser.
To sign on to Sage Accpac ERP Desktop:
1. Start Windows.
2. Click the Sage Accpac ERP icon on your Windows desktop or

choose Sage Accpac ERP from the Windows Start/Programs
menu. The Sage Accpac ERP desktop opens with a signon dialog
box.
The user ID and company displayed are from your last work
session. The session date is the current DOS date, unless you had
previously entered a future date in that case, the future date is
displayed.
There are three possible display modes for the Open Company
dialog box. The display depends on how users were set up in the
Users form: with Sage Accpac ERP authentication only, with
Windows authentication only, or with Both.
3. Enter your user code in the User ID field.
This is the code that your system administrator entered in your

user record (as described in Chapter 6, Entering User

Information, in the System Manager Administrator Guide). The

system verifies that the code is valid.
If Windows Authentication was not selected in the Sage Accpac
Sage Accpac
Starting
ERP Users form for your user ID, the Open Company dialog box
will display the Windows Authentication option, but it will be
disabled, as illustrated below. (Note that, on the Sage Accpac
ERP Web desktop, the Windows Authentication option will
always be enabled.)
Opening a
company with
Windows
Authentication
option disabled
If Sage Accpac ERP authentication was chosen for your user ID,
the Open Company dialog box will display the Windows
Authentication option enabled but unchecked, as shown next:
Windows
Authentication
option not
selected
When you enter your User ID and select the Windows

Authentication option, the Domain field is added to the Open
Company dialog box, as shown next:
Windows
Authentication
option selected,
Domain field
displayed
By default, the Windows Domain and User ID default to the

Domain and User ID for the currently logged-in user.
User Guide 23

The Change Password field will always be disabled in Windows

Authentication mode since you, the current user, will have been
authenticated when you logged onto Windows.
4. Select a company from the drop-down list in the Company field.
Session date 5. Enter a date in the Session Date field.
The date is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the Sage
Accpac ERP company desktop.
If the session date you enter is not valid (for example, the date
occurs during a closed fiscal period for the company), a message
asks whether you want to continue.
Password 6. Enter a password in the Password field if security has been

turned on for your company. Your password is stored in your
user record.
To change your password, click the Change Password button.

(See the section, Changing Passwords, later in this chapter.)
Enter password in
Password field
If you forget your password, ask your system administrator to

enter a new one in your user record, then sign on to Sage Accpac
ERP with this new password. After signing on, change the
password.
7. Click OK to open the company desktop.
The company name is displayed in the title bar of the Sage

Accpac ERP desktop. The session date is displayed in the status
bar at the bottom of the Sage Accpac ERP desktop. Programs
that have been installed and activated appear as folders in the
left pane.

Signing On to Sage Accpac ERP from a Web Browser

To use Sage Accpac ERP from your Web browser, you need an ID
Sage Accpac
and a password. Please see your administrator for these.
Starting
The first time that you type the Sage Accpac ERP server URL into the
address bar of the Internet Explorer, you will receive messages to
update operating system files. On subsequent visits to the site, you
will not need to perform these installations unless there are newer
versions of applications on the Sage Accpac ERP server.
The update messages request the installation of:
The Sage Accpac ERP Web Session Manager.
The Sage Accpac ERP Web Client Support Setup program.
Sage Accpac ERP Common Controls.
To open Sage Accpac ERP from your Web browser:
1. Open your Web browser.
2. Type the URL for your Sage Accpac server in the Address bar.
The first time you open Sage Accpac ERP in a browser, a screen
similar to the following appears:
Download Sage
Accpac Web
Session Manager
3. Click Yes.
User Guide 25

If this is also the first time you have attempted to access a Sage
Accpac server, you will receive a message similar to the
following :
Accessing a Sage
Accpac server
4. Click Yes.
The following Welcome screen appears:
5. Click Next.
6. The following dialog box appears:
7. Enter your User ID, your password, and the domain name, then
click OK. The following screen appears:
8. Click the Sign On tab.

The company signon dialog box appears:
Sage Accpac
Starting
9. Enter your user ID and password, select the company database,
enter the session date (or leave the default), then click OK.
(Select the Windows Authentication option if you are signing on
using your Windows ID.)
The Web desktop appears:
Closing the Company Database from your Browser

1. When you are ready to close the company database, click the
Sign Off tab at the top of the Sage Accpac ERP desktop.
The following message appears:
2. Click OK to return to the Welcome page, then close your

browser.
User Guide 27

System Manager Services
System Manager Services

There are two services provided with Sage Accpac ERP: Common
Services and Administrative Services. These services are installed
when you install the System Manager.
Common Services Common Services manage data that is shared by all the integrated
accounting applications for your company. The Common Services
folder contains the following icons:
Company Profile.
Fiscal Calendar.
Scheduling.
Currency.
Optional Fields.
Tax Services this icon is displayed if Tax Services has been

installed and activated for your company.
Bank Services this icon is displayed if Bank Services has been

installed and activated for your company.
Administrative Administrative Services are programs used by the system

Services
administrator. You see the icon for Administrative Services if you
are the system administrator or have been given authority to check
data integrity. Otherwise, you do not need to be concerned with
Administrative Services.
Starting an Application
Activated accounting applications appear on the Sage Accpac ERP
company desktop. Each application is located in its own folder, with
icons for the various forms needed by that application located in the
right pane.

Opening Sage Accpac ERP in the Sage Desktop
To open a form, you double-click its icon or select the icon using the
navigation buttons, and then press Enter.
The example below shows the company desktop, with folders in the
Sage Accpac
Starting
left pane, and Common Services icons in the right pane.
Company desktop
The next screen shot shows the desktop as viewed from a Web
browser:

1. Click Programs, Sage Software, then select Sage Desktop.
Signon
User Guide 29

2. Enter your User ID, select your company, then click OK.
The Sage Desktop opens, as shown next:
Sage Desktop
Tasks pane
My Tasks pane
Contents pane
There are three panes:
Tasks. Displays all installed Sage Software, with links to

your company database.
My Tasks. Displays items you move from the Tasks pane.

You can also add links to Web sites in this pane.
Content. Displays Web sites and the Sage Information

Center tab. This pane, unlike Tasks and My Tasks, has no
label. It does, however, display tabs denoting Web pages,
and the tab labelled Sage Information Center.
These panes are discussed in the following sections.
Moving Around on the Sage Desktop

You can customize the basic Sage Desktop by moving the panes
around, displaying them, hiding them, or resizing them. Your most-
often used tasks can be moved from one pane to another.

To reposition panes:
1. Click the title bar of the pane, then drag it to the new location.
Sage Accpac
Drag pane to new
Starting
location
You can leave the pane anywhere on the Sage Desktop:
a. To position a pane at the edge of the desktop, continue to

move it until the tip of the mouse pointer touches the edge
of the desktop.
b. To line panes up side by side, move the second one until the
tip of the mouse pointer touches the edge of the first pane.
c. To line panes up horizontally, touch the tip of the mouse

pointer to the top or bottom edges of the Sage Desktop.
d. To remove a pane from the desktop, click the X in the upper

right corner of the pane. (You can display the pane again by
selecting it from the View menu.)
The next section discusses how to use Sage Accpac ERP applications
on the Sage Desktop.
Using the Tasks Pane

Your company database is listed in the pane labeled Tasks. The
following links are also included in this pane by default:
User Guide 211

Sage on the Web. Click this link to display pages from the Sage
Software Website. The pages include:
Sage Software Home Page
Sage Software News
Sage Software Support
Sage Software Training.
Each of these pages opens in its own tab in the Content pane, not
in your usual Web browser.
Information Center. Click this link to reopen the default Sage

Information Center home page on the Content pane if it had
been closed.
Get Started. Opens the Sage Desktop online help file. You can
view the Sage Accpac ERP Getting Started help pages from this
file also.
Getting started
with online Help

All your Sage Accpac ERP applications installed and activated

appear in subfolders of the company folder on the Tasks pane:
Tasks pane
Sage Accpac
Starting
Your company name appears here
Sage Accpac ERP folders
Click the plus sign beside each folder to display Sage Accpac ERP
accounting items.
Tasks pane,
displaying Sage
Accpac ERP items
Sage Accpac ERP items open just as they did on the traditional
desktop.
User Guide 213

Using the My Tasks Pane

You can move functions specific to your needs from your company
folder in the Tasks pane to groups you create on the My Tasks pane.
For our example, we will assume that you work on the following:
Accounts Payable transactions.
Printing A/P reports.
Scheduling.
To create a group in the My Tasks pane:
1. Right-click on My Tasks, then click Add New Group to open the

Create New Group dialog box:
Create new group
2. Enter a name for your new group (for example, My User), then
click OK.
The new group appears in the My Tasks pane:
My Tasks pane
Now you add items from the Tasks pane to the new group.
There are two methods you can use to add items to groups;
either drag the item from the Tasks pane directly to the group
you created or right-click the item, then take the following steps:
a. After right-clicking, select the Add To My Tasks option

from the context menu.

The following dialog box opens:
Add to My Tasks
dialog box
Sage Accpac
Starting
b. Accept the defaults (unless you want to place this item in a
different group than the default), then click OK.
The following example shows three different groups we created

in the My Tasks pane, with the items we moved to each group
from the Tasks pane.
Drag individual If you drag items to the My Task pane from company folders,
items
you must drag each task individually to the new group; you
cannot drag folders.
User Guide 215

Moving and Deleting Tasks and Groups in the My Tasks Pane
You can move and delete items and tasks in the My Tasks pane.
Move groups up or down by dragging the group title to another

position.
To move tasks within groups, drag them up or down in the list

of tasks within that group.
To delete a task from a group, right-click the task, select

Remove From My Tasks, then answer Yes to the confirmation
question.
To delete a group, right-click the title, select Remove Group,

then answer Yes to the confirmation question.
Using the Content Pane

This pane can be used to display a home page of your choosing, or
you can leave the default (Sage Information Center), which displays
links to information related to Sage Accpac ERP and other Sage
Software products you install.
The default configuration is always available, even when you set up

a different home page.

Click the drop-down arrows to open the following topics:
Alerts and Notifications. Link to hot fixes and product bulletins.
Sage Accpac
News and Announcements. View current news about Sage
Starting
Accpac ERP.
Training and Support. Click these links for information about

training that is available for Sage Accpac ERP products.
Tips and Techniques. Read quick tips about using Sage Accpac
ERP.
Comments and Feedback. Send feedback on products and

services to Sage Software.
Changing the Current Home Page
1. Click Tools, Options on the Desktop menu bar to open the

Options dialog box:
2. Click the Select button to choose the type of home page:
If you select the Web Page type, browse to the folder where
the Web page is located, highlight the page, then click Open.
Click OK to return to the desktop.
User Guide 217

If you select the Web Link type, enter the URL in the address
field, click OK, select View Home Page After You Click
OK, then click OK to return to the desktop.
The Web site you selected as a home page appears in another tab
on the Content pane, with the URL of the Web site as the tabs
label, as shown below:
Tab label
Adding More Than One Web Site
You can add Web sites to the Content pane as explained above, but
you can also add Web sites to the My Tasks pane.
1. Right-click on the My Tasks pane, then select Add To My Tasks

from the context menu. This opens the Add to My Tasks dialog
box (illustrated on page 15).
2. Select Web Link as the type of task.
3. Click the Select button, then enter the URL in the address field
and click OK:
4. In the Add To My Tasks dialog box, change the name of the task
if you wish, and add it to an existing group, or create a new
group for it.

Changing Companies
5. Click OK to return to the My Tasks pane, where you will see the
Web site included as a task in the group.
6. Click on the task (the Web site name you entered in step 4) to
Sage Accpac
Starting
open the Web site. A new tab appears in the Content pane,
labeled with the sites URL, and the Web site appears in the
pane, as shown below:
Content pane with

another tab
You can add links to more than one Web site in this manner, with
each Web site creating another tab in the Content pane when it is
opened for the first time.
Closing Web sites Click the X in the top right corner of the Content pane to close the
currently-open Web site and remove its tab. (Clicking the X removes
the Web site from the Content pane; it does not delete the Web site
from your My Tasks group.)
Browser note Web sites you open from the Sage Desktop appear in the Content
pane they do not open in your usual browser.
Changing Companies
You can change companies while you have Sage Accpac ERP open
whether on the traditional desktop, or from your Web browser.
Please see the following sections for instructions.
User Guide 219

Changing Companies
Changing Companies on the Desktop

You can open another company without leaving Sage Accpac ERP.
To change companies on the company desktop:
1. Close each open window for the current company, then choose
Open Company from the File menu.
If you decide not to close the current company, click the Cancel
button before selecting a new company; in that way, the current
company remains open.
Select another
company
2. From the drop-down list, select a different company to open.
3. Click OK.
Changing Companies in a Web Browser

You can open another company without having to sign on again to
the Sage Accpac ERP Enterprise Server.
1. Click the Sign Off tab, then click the Sign On tab.
The Sage Accpac ERP Signon dialog box appears.
2. Choose a different company from the drop-down list in the

Company field, make sure your User ID is correct, enter your
password (if required), and then click OK to open the new
company in your Web browser.

Changing Passwords
Changing Passwords
You can change your user password when you sign on to Sage
Sage Accpac
Accpac ERP.
Starting
1. Click the Change Password button in the Open Company dialog
box.
The Change Password dialog box appears:
2. Enter your user ID.
3. Enter your old password in the Old Password field.
4. Enter the new password in the New field.
5. Enter the new password again in the Confirm New Password

field.
6. Click OK. You return to the Open Company dialog box.
7. To start Sage Accpac ERP, type your new password in the

Password field, then click OK.
Where To Now?
For basic information about Sage Accpac ERP, read Chapter 3 and
Chapter 4.
Chapter 3, Learning the Basics, describes techniques for using Sage

Accpac ERP options, commands, forms and the calculator.
Chapter 4, Using the Finder, tells you how to use the Finder to
select the data you need.
User Guide 221

Chapter 3
Learning the Basics
Changing Icon Display.......................................................... 32

Working with Records .......................................................... 32
Learning
Learning the
Moving Around in Sage Accpac ERP ......................................... 33
Basics
Basics
Displaying Data ............................................................ 34
Using the Calculator ............................................................ 35
the
Calculator Chart ............................................................ 35
Entering Dates Using the Drop-Down Calendar ................................... 36
Getting Help ................................................................... 37
Using Sage Accpac ERP Menu Commands ........................................ 37
File Menu ..................................................................... 37
Object Menu ................................................................... 37
View Menu .................................................................... 38
Macro Menu ................................................................... 39
Help Menu .................................................................... 39
Help Topics ............................................................... 310
Whats This? .............................................................. 310
Sage Accpac ERP on the Web ............................................... 310
System Information ........................................................ 310
About Sage Accpac ERP .................................................... 311
Online Documentation ..................................................... 315
User Guide 3i
Sage Accpac ERP INTERNATIONAL Confidential


Chapter 3
Learning the Basics
This chapter describes basic techniques for using Sage Accpac ERP,
including how to change your icon display, selecting user options,
and using basic commands in records and the calculator.
Learning the
Switching folders When a plus sign (+) appears to the left of a folder name on the Sage
Basics
Accpac ERP desktop, you can double-click the plus sign or the folder
to display a list of subfolders, then double-click the icon in the right
pane that you want to open.
Print destination To select or change your print destination, choose Print Destination
from the File menu, or double-click the print destination icon in the
right corner of the status bar on the Sage Accpac ERP desktop. (See
also Chapter 10, Printing.)
Printing from Click Print from the File menu in the form you opened on the Sage
browser
Accpac ERP Web desktop.
Columns You can rearrange and hide columns, change column widths, and
split lists of data in two in windows that are wider than the screen.
For instructions about rearranging columns, see Appendix B, Using
a Mouse or Keyboard, in this guide.
Moving within Press the Alt key on your keyboard at the same time as you press the
forms
key corresponding to the underlined letter in a tabs name to move to
that tab.
Using desktop See later sections in this chapter that discuss the commands in each
menus
of the desktop menus (File, Object, View, Macro, and Help menus).
User Guide 31
Sage Accpac ERP International, Inc. Confidential

Changing Icon Display
Changing Icon Display

You can change the way you view items on the desktop by choosing
one of these options: Large Icons, Small Icons, List, or Details from
the View menu.
View Description
Icons in the right-hand pane in
Large Icons rows, names below each icon.
Small Icons Small icons, in rows, with item

names to the right
List Small icons, with item names to

the right.
Details Program structure (type and

details) in columns.
The display is saved as a Registry file; each time you start Sage
Accpac ERP, the items are displayed using your previous selection.
Working with Records

Several kinds of forms exist in Sage Accpac ERP. Some have columns
of data for viewing, such as G/L Batch List and the Finder. Other
forms can be edited, such as G/L Journal Entry and Currency Rates.
Depending on the form, you use some keys or buttons for viewing
data, others for moving around, and others to enter and delete data.
Use the following shortcut keys, icons, and buttons when you work
with Sage Accpac ERP forms. Note that each key, icon, or button
described does not appear on every form.

Moving Around in Sage Accpac ERP
Key/button Action
Esc Cancel/close a pop-up window.
Alt+A Save a new record.
Alt+C (or Alt+F4) Close a form or dialog box.
Alt+E Open the Set Criteria dialog box.
Learning the
Basics
Alt+H Display the Help menu.
Alt+P Print a report.
Alt+S
Save changes made to current/new record.
Ctrl / Page Down Move to the last item in the Finder list.
Ctrl / Page Up Move to the first item in the Finder list.
Ctrl/Shift/Tab Move out of a grid or list to the button or field directly above the
grid or list.
Ctrl/Tab Move out of a grid or list to the first button or field following the
grid or list.
Delete or Alt+D
Delete the displayed record or row.
End Display the last record.
Home Display the first entry.
Insert Insert a blank row to add a new record.

(or Ctrl+Insert) Begin a new entry when the cursor is in a field that has a New
button beside it.
Page Up / Go to the top or bottom record visible in a list.

Page Down
User Guide 33

Key/button Action
Tab or Enter; Shift+Tab Go to next column or previous column.

or Shift+Enter
or (up or down arrow) Go up or down one line in a grid.
Displaying Data
Icon/
Key Action Button
Refresh the form or dialog box to insert a new

record.
Display online Help.
Turn on the edit mode in a list or grid. Press it again

to turn off the edit mode.
F4 Open the calendar to select a date.
Display the Fiscal Year/Period list.
Display the Finder.
Display the information for a record.

(Go button)
Enlarge the selected record and display more

information about the record (Zoom button)
Shift key + Open or close a popup window when there is a

Zoom button.
Drill down to a source transaction.
Arrow keys Move to the first, last, next, or previous record (see
also Ctrl/Page Up and Ctrl/Page Down in the table (Navigation buttons)
above).

Using the Calculator
Using the Calculator

Sage Accpac ERP includes a calculator that allows you to do simple
calculations without leaving a data-entry field. You can open the
calculator from any field that accepts financial data.
To use the calculator:
1. Press the + key on the numeric keypad.
The calculator displays the value in your current data-entry
Learning the
field. If you start typing now, the digits you enter are added to
Basics
the end of the displayed number. To clear the displayed number,
click CE.
2. Enter the first number in your calculation.
Click digits 0 to 9 and the decimal point on the calculator, or

enter them using the keyboard or the numeric keypad.
Calculator Chart
Action Button Key
Add + +
Subtract
Multiply x
Divide /
Find the percentage % %
Calculate the result = =
Change the sign
Erase one digit at a time Back B or Backspace
Clear the displayed number CE E
Clear the current calculation CA C
Insert the displayed number at your Paste P
current position
Add the displayed number to M+ A
memory
Subtract the displayed number from M S
memory
User Guide 35

Entering Dates Using the Drop-Down Calendar
Action Button Key

Recall the value stored in memory, MR R
but do not clear it
Clear the value stored in memory MC M
Display help Help H
Entering Dates Using the Drop-Down Calendar

You can easily insert dates using the drop-down calendar.
Calendar 1. Click the small calendar icon located beside the date field to
icon
display the calendar.
2. Click a date (or press the arrow keys on your keyboard to move
from day to day in the displayed month and then press the Enter
key). The selected date appears in the date field, and the
drop-down calendar closes.
Click the arrow keys on the calendar or press the Page

Up/Page Down keys to navigate from one month to another.
Press the Home or End keys to navigate to the first or last

day of the displayed month.
Note that you can type a date in the field, in the format
month/day/year, without using the drop-down calendar, but if you
try to tab in the date field, you will simply move to the next field in
the dialog box.

Getting Help
Getting Help
You can display online help about a form, field, or message you see
on your screen by pressing the F1 key or clicking the Help button (if
the button is displayed). From the Web desktop, click the Help tab to
open general help about downloading common controls, or press F1
in an open form.
Using Sage Accpac ERP Menu Commands
Learning the
Basics
The following sections explain the commands included in Sage
Accpac ERP desktop menus.
File Menu
Open Company: open another company without exiting Sage
Accpac ERP.
Close Company. close the current company without exiting

Sage Accpac ERP.
Page Setup: select your standard printer and print options.
Print Destination: specify where you usually print to and

whether you will use the report's predefined orientation and
paper size.
Exit: end the current Sage Accpac ERP session.
Object Menu
Use this menu to add or rearrange folders or items on the company
desktop, and update information for them. Note that you can only
Cut or Delete items that you added to the desktop.
User Guide 37

View Menu
Note that new folders, macros, reports, and programs added from
the desktop are not available when you view Sage Accpac ERP in a
browser.
Open: open the currently selected item on the company

desktop.
New: create a new folder or item on the company desktop.
Cut: move the selected item to another folder.
Copy: copy the selected item so you can paste it into another
folder.
Paste: paste a copied item into the selected folder.
Delete: delete the selected item.
Restore Defaults: restore default settings for the selected item.
Properties: change information for the selected item.
View Menu
Toolbar: display and hide the Toolbar, which includes buttons
for some of the most common commands in Sage Accpac ERP.
Status Bar: display information at the bottom of the Sage Accpac

ERP desktop.
Large Icons: display items in the right pane of the Sage Accpac
ERP desktop as large icons with names below.
Small Icons: display items as small icons with names to the

right, in as many columns as will fit in the desktop window.
List: display items as small icons in a single column with names

to the right.
Details: display items as small icons in a single column with

names, object type, and object IDs to the right.

Macro Menu
Preferences: personalize your settings for Sage Accpac ERP.
Macro Menu
Start Recording: start recording a new macro.
Stop Recording: stop recording a macro.
Run: run an existing macro.
Learning the
Edit: edit a macro you have recorded or write a new macro.
Basics
Options: change the default macro folder for Sage Accpac ERP.
Help Menu
The Help menu includes the following commands:
Help topics.
Whats this?
Sage Accpac ERP on the Web.
System Information.
Licenses.
LanPak Users.
IAP Users.
Timecard Users.
About Sage Accpac ERP.
Online Documentation.
These are discussed in the next sections.
User Guide 39

Help Menu
Help Topics
The Help Topics command displays Sage Accpac ERP Help file
contents. You can click the Contents tab of the Help to find
information about forms and procedures, or click the Index tab for
information about a specific topic. The glossary tab displays
accounting information.
Whats This?
Click this command for point-and-click access to Help about a
menu item or toolbar button.
Sage Accpac ERP on the Web

Clicking the Sage Accpac ERP on the Web command provides
shortcuts to Sage Accpac ERP Web sites on the Internet.
System Information
Click this command for information about your installed Sage
Accpac ERP system and programs, including:
The System Manager version.
The drives and folders where programs and shared data are
stored.
The version number of each program and service associated

with Sage Accpac ERP, and whether the program or service is
active for the current database.
The name, date, size, and location of each program module

currently loaded under Windows (available when you choose
the Modules button).

Help Menu
About Sage Accpac ERP

Click this command to open the About Sage ERP dialog box, as
shown next:
Learning the
Basics
The information displayed includes:
Copyright notice.
Name of company and person the Sage Accpac ERP product is

registered to, with the product serial number.
The following buttons that open new windows:
View the End-User License Agreement (described below).
System Information (described below).
Licenses. (described below).
User Guide 311

Help Menu
View the End-User Click this button on the About Sage Accpac ERP screen to view the
License Agreement
Product License Agreement.
Button
Note that you can click the Print button to print the agreement.
System Information Click this button on the About Sage Accpac ERP screen to view the
Button
version of the System Manager that you are running, information
about the drives and folders where programs and shared data are
stored, the version number of each program and service associated
with Sage Accpac ERP, and whether the program or service is active
for the current database. If you then click the Modules button, the
name, date, size, and location of each program module currently
loaded under Windows will be displayed.

Help Menu
Licenses Click the Licenses button on the About Sage Accpac ERP screen to
open the following dialog box:
Learning the
Basics
The Licenses dialog box displays the following information:
A list of Sage Accpac ERP applications, with their version

numbers.
Name of individual and company each application is licensed to.
Number of users currently using Sage Accpac ERP.
The following buttons:
LanPak Users. Opens the LanPak Users dialog box that displays
the current user, the maximum number of LanPak users
allowed, and how many LanPak users are currently signed on.
User Guide 313

Help Menu
IAP Users. Opens the Integration Access Pack Users dialog box
that displays the name of the current user, the maximum
number of IAP users allowed, and how many IAP users are
currently signed on.
Timecard Users. Opens the Timecard Users dialog box that

shows the name of the user, the maximum number of Timecard
users allowed, and how many Timecard users are currently
signed on.
License Information. Opens a popup showing information

about the product license.

Help Menu
Register. Opens a dialog box where you can register a

highlighted program during the 30-day grace period.
Online Documentation
Learning the
Click this Help Menu item to open readmes, user guides, update
Basics
notices, and getting started guides for the Sage Accpac ERP
applications that have been installed.
User Guide 315

Chapter 4
Using the Finder
The Finder ..................................................................... 41
Viewing Data in the Finder ...................................................... 43
Restricting the Choice of Records in the Finder .................................... 44
Changing Color in the Finder .................................................... 45
Setting Up Criteria for Selecting Records ......................................... 46
Clearing Criteria by Restoring Defaults .......................................... 410
Setting Properties ............................................................. 411
Using the
Finder
User Guide 4i
Sage Software Confidential


Chapter 4
Using the Finder
This chapter introduces you to the Sage Accpac ERP Finder and
explains how to use the Finder to search for data.
This chapter also explains how to set criteria to restrict data

displayed by the Finder, and explains how to set up the Finder to
appear whenever you start certain Sage Accpac ERP programs.
The Finder
Finder The Finder is a tool for looking up account numbers and other coded
Using the
information in Sage Accpac ERP data entry screens, such as general
Finder
ledger account numbers, customer and vendor numbers, inventory
item numbers, currency rates, and currency codes.
Click the Finder To open a Finder, click the Finder button or press F5. A list of
button or press F5
records is displayed; you select one, the Finder closes, and the
selected record is inserted into the original data entry field.
In the Finder, you can:
Change the way data is displayed. (See Viewing Data in the

Finder, later in this chapter.)
User Guide 41

The Finder
Reduce the number of records displayed by the Finder before

you make a selection. (Read Restricting the Choice of Records
in the Finder, later in this chapter.)
Select a record.
Double-click the record. You can use the vertical scroll bar to
view records further down the list.
Or
Press Tab to move the cursor into the list, use the arrow keys
to highlight a record, then click the Select button or press
Enter.
Search for records by various fields and methods:
Specify which field you want to use to search for the record.
Specify which part of the record name or number you can

identify. You can search by specifying the beginning of a
code or description (Starts With), or you can specify letters
or numbers in the middle of the code or name (Contains).
Contains is especially useful when looking for customer or

vendor names. For example, you can choose Contains if you
know that the name contains light, but cant remember the
complete name.
Type the numbers or letters of the code or description you

are looking for. The Finder will narrow its search as you
type more characters. You can use wildcards to narrow the
search even further.
Change the color of the text or the background in a Finder result

field. (See Changing Color in the Finder, later in this chapter.)
View the field as it will appear in a Crystal Report:
If you are creating customized reports, use the Field Name

as Column Heading option. This lets you see the internal
field names in column headings and related data.

Viewing Data in the Finder
View optional fields in Finders.
The Finder saves You do not have to set Finder options each time you use the
all your settings
Finder. For example, if you always search for customers by the
Customer Name field, the Finder will save the Find By
Customer Name setting, so you can click the Finder button, type
the customer name, and then press Enter to display the record.
Viewing Data in the Finder

Using the Finder, you can:
Search automatically after entering search criteria, by selecting

Auto Search, or search after you've finished entering your
criteria, by clearing the Auto Search option and choosing the
Find Now button.
Using the
Finder
Move columns around, change the widths of columns, and hide
a column you do not want to see. You can also split the window
horizontally so that you can see different data in the two
windows at the same time, as described in Appendix B, Using a
Mouse or Keyboard.
The Columns option (in the Settings menu) lets you display any
or all fields found in the form. There is a default selection or you
can choose from a list.
The Finder respects security rights. If a user does not have rights
to view information, it will not be displayed.
Note. You can export the resulting list. Simply click the File
menu and choose Export. (For instructions on exporting, see
Chapter 12 Importing and Exporting Data.)
User Guide 43

Restricting the Choice of Records in the Finder
Restricting the Choice of Records in the Finder

For efficiency, you can set criteria to display a smaller group of
records in the Finder. For example, in General Ledger you can:
Set up appropriate lists of accounts for particular fields in data

entry forms. (For example, its easy to find the correct expense
account if you have a limited number of accounts to choose
from.)
Display inventory items that belong to a group of categories,

account sets, or structure codes.
List vendors or customers having a particular group code or

currency code.
Using criteria You can use criteria for a single record search, or you can save the
criteria until you clear it.
If you save criteria, you can define different criteria for each field
with a Finder button. (Note that the settings are saved only for a
single User ID.)
Follow the steps in the next section, Setting Up Criteria for Selecting
Records to learn how to set criteria.
Note that if you set criteria in the Finder, the records that appear
when you use the navigation buttons (First, Last, Next, Previous)
reflect the criteria set in the Finder.
The Finder saves Note, also, that if you save criteria in the Finder, and do not clear the
criteria
criteria later, the Finder will continue to display a subset of records
until you clear the criteria.
See the section, Clearing Criteria by Restoring Defaults, later in

this chapter.

Changing Color in the Finder
Changing Color in the Finder

Color options let you highlight a field using color for the text or the
background.
To change color in the Finder:
1. Choose Color from the Settings menu in the Finder.
The following screen appears:
Using the
Finder
2. Choose an item from the Field list (the choices will vary
depending on the form you have open).
3. Click the Text Color button or the Background Color button.
User Guide 45

Setting Up Criteria for Selecting Records
4. Click a color with your mouse, or click in the color range section,
then click OK.
The Finder reappears, exhibiting the color you chose.
In our example below, we chose yellow as the background color

for the field.
To remove the colour, click Restore Color Default in the Settings

menu.

This section takes you through the steps to set up criteria for
selecting records from the Finder. Our example uses the Currency
Codes Finder, but the steps apply to all Finders.
To set up criteria:
1. Open the Currency Codes dialog box, then click the Finder icon
beside the Currency Code field.

2. Click the Set Criteria button, to open the Set Criteria dialog box.
You will see a series of rows and columns (called cells), which
are labeled to the left of the table.
Set Criteria:
Currency Codes
3. From the drop-down list beside the field labeled Column,

select a field that you will set criteria for. For our example, we
chose Currency Code.
Our next step is to select a field in the Currency Code records to
Using the
which to apply selection criteria.
Finder
4. Click Add. The Currency Code label moves to the cell labeled
Field.
5. Double-click the cell beside the Criteria label to view the

following dialog box:
Select a symbol 6. Click the down arrow to open a list of mathematical symbols
(called relational operators), then select the one you need.
User Guide 47

Only the symbols that make sense for your data are displayed;
any that do not apply are dimmed.
Value Description
= Equal
> Greater than
< Less than
>= Greater than or equal to
<= Less than or equal to
!= Not equal to
LIKE For example, $
7. For our example, we selected LIKE.
In this case, assume you want the Finder to list all currency
codes that start with the letter C or A. To enter the first value,
type C, then click OK.
Our next step is to enter a second set of characters that the

currency code can be like.
Adding a second 8. To add the second alternative for the currency code,
value (Or)
double-click the Or cell (the cell below the Criteria cell).
9. Again, select LIKE from the list of symbols, then type A in the
field, and click OK.
You are now going to narrow the list of codes by specifying

criteria for another field.
Specifying another 10. To set up criteria for another field, choose another field from the
field (AND)
Column drop-down list (for example, Symbol) and click Add.
The field label appears as the header of the next column.
11. Double-click the Criteria cell under the Symbol column, select
the equals sign (=), type $ (dollar sign) in the field, and then click
OK.

The Set Criteria dialog box now looks like this:
This means a search for all currencies with a code that starts with
C and that use the $ symbol or all codes that start with A, and do
or do not use the $ symbol.
12. Click Save, then click OK to return to the Currency Codes dialog
box.
In our example, the following currency is displayed:
Using the
Finder
The Finder displays only the records selected according to the
criteria; that is, the currency code AUD, and the $ symbol.
The following explains the buttons in the Set Criteria dialog box:
Add. After selecting a field from the drop-down list beside the
Column label, click the Add button to move your selection to the
column header.
Delete. With your cursor in a cell, click the Delete button to

delete all criteria chosen for that field. If you have other criteria
in another column, it will move to the emptied column.
User Guide 49

Clearing Criteria by Restoring Defaults
Show Filter. Click the Show Filter button to display all the
criteria you have chosen.
Clear. Clear all or part of your criteria by clicking the Clear

button, then selecting an option (Cell, Row, Column, All).
Edit. Click Edit to change criteria set in a previous session.
Cancel. Click the Cancel button to cancel all criteria chosen in

this session.
Once you select a record from the Finder to work with, the data
entry form appears, displaying your selection. For example, the
following screen shot displays the Currency Codes form after the
code AUD had been selected in the Finder:
Clearing Criteria by Restoring Defaults

1. Highlight the item that you want to clear criteria from, (for
example, the Currency Codes icon), then choose Restore
Defaults from the Object menu on the company desktop.

Setting Properties
Our example is shown below:
Object menu
The Restore Defaults dialog box appears, as shown next:
Restore Defaults dialog

box
Using the
Finder
2. Select the Finder Criteria option, and clear the options you dont
need to restore.
3. Click OK.
All Finder criteria that were set up and saved for Currency
Codes are cleared.
Setting Properties
You can set up Sage Accpac ERP to display the Finder directly when
you choose certain items (for example, Tax Authorities, Optional
Tables, and G/L Accounts).
User Guide 411

Setting Properties
To start the Finder first:
1. Highlight the icon on the company desktop (again, our example

uses the Currency Codes Finder).
2. From the Object menu, choose Properties.
The icons Properties dialog box appears.
3. To display the Finder as soon as you click the icon, select the
Start Finder First option.
To start multiple copies:
1. To be able to have the same form open more than once in a work
session, select the Start Multiple Copies option in the Properties
dialog box.
If you select this option, a new form opens each time you
double-click the icon.
If you do not select this option, Sage Accpac ERP displays

the currently-open form when you double-click the icon.
This prevents more than one copy of a form being
unintentionally started.
2. When you are finished selecting options, click OK.

Chapter 5
Customizing Your Desktop
Creating a New Folder .......................................................... 51
Adding a Macro to a Folder ..................................................... 53
Adding a Report to a Folder ..................................................... 55
Adding a Non-Sage Accpac ERP Macro to a Folder ................................ 56
Copying Items to Another Folder ................................................ 59
Deleting a Folder ............................................................... 59
Changing Properties ........................................................... 510
Changing Preferences.......................................................... 511
Restoring Defaults ............................................................. 511
Your Desktop
Customizing
User Guide 5i


Chapter 5
Customizing Your Desktop
This chapter describes how to customize your company desktop by
creating new folders containing the Sage Accpac ERP programs,
macros, reports, and other DOS or Windows programs you use on a
day-to-day basis.
Adding the items you use regularly to your own folder allows you to
be more efficient. You will not be switching from one window to
another to find items.
If security is turned You can create new folders and add or copy items to them if you are
on
authorized to customize the company desktop. Ask your system
administrator for details.
Browser You cannot customize the desktop from a Web browser; however,
desktop customizations that were set up in the Sage Accpac ERP
desktop will display and run in a Web browser.
Macro You can create a VBA macro to customize your desktop.
Your Desktop
Customizing
Creating a New Folder
You can create new folders to contain the applications that you use
frequently. The folder can contain program icons, macros, or reports.
You can create as many folders as you wish.
To create a new folder:
1. From the Object menu on the company desktop, choose New,

then choose Folder.
User Guide 51
ACCPAC International, Inc. Confidential

Creating a New Folder
The following dialog box appears:
New folder
2. In the Title field, type a name for the new folder.
3. To change the icon for the report, click Change Icon.
Change Icon
a. Select an icon from the display, or, if you have other icon
files available, choose the Browse button in the Change Icon
dialog box to display a list of files and directories. Select a
filename from the list, click OK, then select an icon and click
OK again.
b. Click OK to accept the icon, then click OK again.
4. Select the All Users option so this new object will appear on the
Sage Accpac ERP desktops of all the users who open the
database. (Once the object has been added to the desktop, you
cannot change the All Users option.)
5. Click Finish. The new folder appears on the Sage Accpac ERP
desktop.
You can now add or copy items to the folder, as described in the
following sections.

Adding a Macro to a Folder

You can add a macro icon to a folder on the company desktop, and
give it a unique icon and name. You can then double-click the icon
for quick access to CA-BLE or VBA macros that you created in Sage
Accpac ERP, to be run in Sage Accpac ERP.
To add a macro to a folder:
1. Highlight the folder you want to add the macro to.
2. From the Object menu, choose New, then select Macro.
New macro
3. In the Title field, type a name for the macro.
4. To change the icon for the macro, click Change Icon.
Your Desktop
Customizing
OK again.
b. Click OK to return to the New Macro screen.
database.
Note. Once the object has been added to the desktop, you
cannot change the All Users option.
User Guide 53

6. Click Next to proceed to the following screen:
Select a Macro file
7. Enter the name of the macro file, including the path and
extension, or click the Browse button to select from the default
macro directory.
If you choose Browse, the following dialog box appears:
Select macro from

default directory
8. Select the macro filename, then select Open.
9. To allow users to use this macro on the Sage Accpac ERP Web
desktop, select the option Display On Web Desktop, then enter
the URL of the Sage Accpac ERP Web desktop location, or accept
the default path.
Note that macros created before version 5.0 of System Manager

will not appear on the Sage Accpac ERP Web desktop.
10. Click Finish. The macro is added to the highlighted folder on the
Sage Accpac ERP desktop.
See Chapter 13, Using Macros, for more information about using
the macro feature in Sage Accpac ERP.

Adding a Report to a Folder
To add macros created outside of Sage Accpac ERP, see Adding a

Non-Sage Accpac ERP Macro to a Folder.
Adding a Report to a Folder

You can add a report to a folder on the company desktop, and give it
a unique icon and name.
To add a report to a folder:
1. Highlight the folder you want to add the report to.
2. From the Object menu, choose New, then choose Report.
The Report properties screen appears:
Enter a unique
report name
Your Desktop
Customizing
3. In the Title field, type a name for the report.
4. To change the icon for the report, click Change Icon.
OK again.
b. Choose OK to accept the icon. You return to the New Report

screen.
User Guide 55

Adding a Non-Sage Accpac ERP Macro to a Folder
6. Click Next to proceed to the following screen:
7. To select a report, click the Browse button.
a. Select the report file name (from the default directory or

from another directory).
b. Select Open. You return to the New Report screen.
8. Click Finish. The report is added to the highlighted folder.

You can add icons for VBA macros that you create and run in
another VBA-enabled program, such as Excel..
To add a non-Sage Accpac ERP macro to a folder:
1. Highlight the folder you want to add the macro to.
2. Choose New from the Object menu, then select Program from
the list.

The New Program screen appears:
Enter a unique
folder name
3. Enter a name in the Title field.
4. Click Change Icon. (Optional)
OK again.
b. Choose OK to accept the icon. You return to the Program

properties screen.
5. Select All Users. (Optional)
Your Desktop
Customizing
Select this option so this new icon will appear on the Sage
Accpac ERP desktops of all the users who open the database.
(Once the icon has been added to the desktop, you cannot
change the All Users option.)
6. Click Next.
User Guide 57

Select paths
7. Complete the information as follows:
Command. Enter the full path of the program in the Command

field, or click Browse to choose the program from the list of files
and directories (for example, for a macro that will run from
Excel, enter the following: C:\Program Files\Microsoft
Office\Office\Excel.exe).
Arguments. Enter the location where the macro is stored, with

the name of the macro file. Use quotation marks around the
entry (for example, C:\Program Files\Sage Accpac\
Runtime\GIFI.xls).
Working Directory. Enter a path or use the Browse button to

choose the path (for example, C:\Program Files\Sage
Accpac\Runtime).
8. Click Finish. The new icon appears in the highlighted folder on

the Sage Accpac ERP desktop.
When you double-click the icon you created, the program that you
specified in the Command line opens, then the macro created for that
other program runs. For example, you could add an icon for the
GIFI.xls sample macro, then double-click it on the Sage Accpac ERP
desktop. Excel opens, and the GIFI.xls macro runs, creating a report
of GIFI codes.
See Chapter 13, Using Macros, for information about creating

macros for use in Sage Accpac ERP.

Copying Items to Another Folder
To add macros created in Sage Accpac ERP, see Adding a Macro to

a Folder.
Copying Items to Another Folder

You can copy Sage Accpac ERP Common Services and accounting
applications into the folders you created on the Sage Accpac ERP
desktop. You can also copy any of your macro, report, DOS, or
Windows program items to other folders.
To copy items to another folder:
1. Highlight the item you want to copy.
2. Select Copy from the Object menu.
3. Highlight the folder where you want to place the item.
4. Choose Paste from the Object menu.
A copy of the item appears in the folder. To make its icon or

description unique, see the instructions under Changing
Properties, later in this chapter.
Your Desktop
Customizing
Deleting a Folder
You can delete folders that you created, or copies that you made.
However, you cannot delete items installed by Sage Accpac ERP.
If a folder is not If you try to delete a folder that still contains items (for example,
empty
macros, other folders, or reports), a message warns you that the
folder is not empty. If you delete the folder anyway, the items in the
folder will be deleted also.
To delete a folder:
1. Select the item or folder you want to delete.
User Guide 59

Changing Properties
Delete 2. Press Delete from your keyboard, or choose Delete from the
Object menu.
A message asks you to confirm the deletion.
3. Choose Yes to delete the item or folder.
Changing Properties
You can change the following information (called properties) for
folders and items on your company desktop:
Items Properties that can change

Macro or report Description, path, filename, icon.
Non-Sage Accpac ERP program Description, command line, working
directory.
A copy of an item Description, icon, options for
starting multiple copies and the
Finder.
Folder Description.
You cannot change the All Users option in an object that you created,
whether you selected the All Users option or not.
To change properties:
1. Highlight the folder you want to change.
2. From the Object menu, choose Properties (or click the right
mouse button once, then choose Properties from the list).
That items Properties dialog box appears.
3. Make the changes you need, click Apply, then click OK to return
to the company desktop.
In Properties dialog boxes of items installed by Sage Accpac

ERP, you can change the title and the icon, and change the
following options:

Changing Preferences
Start Multiple Copies. If you select this option, a new form

opens each time you choose the item. If you do not select this
option, the form that is currently open is displayed. This
prevents more than one copy of an item being unintentionally
started.
Start Finder First. If you select this option, the Finder opens each
time you choose the item. (See the instructions under Starting
the Finder First, in Chapter 4, Using the Finder.)
All Users. Select the All Users option so this object will appear on
the Sage Accpac ERP desktops of all the users who open the
Changing Preferences
The Preferences dialog box allows you to choose a print option.
To open the Preferences dialog box, click Preferences in the View

menu on the Sage Accpac ERP desktop.
Your Desktop
Customizing
Restoring Defaults
You can use the Restore Defaults command to restore program
defaults for the selected items. Select Restore Defaults from the
Object menu on the Sage Accpac ERP desktop.
The following options are available:
Print Settings if you select this option, the printer and print
options selected for the item are cleared.
User Guide 511

Restoring Defaults
Finder Criteria if you select this option, any criteria you

selected and saved for the item are cleared.
All Other Settings if you select this option, any settings you
changed for the item are cleared. For example, if you changed
the column widths in a data entry form, the original column
widths are now displayed.
Customization if you select this option, any settings you

customized are changed back to the default.
To restore defaults:
1. Select the item you want to restore defaults to.
2. From the Object menu, choose Restore Defaults.
Restore defaults
3. Select the options you want restored, clear the others, and then
click OK.
The default settings will be restored.

Chapter 6
Editing the Company Profile
Updating the Company Profile .................................................. 61
Tips ....................................................................... 61
How to Use ................................................................ 62
Company Profile
Editing the
User Guide 6i


Chapter 6
Editing the Company Profile
This chapter describes the changes you can make to the company
profile after it has been created.
Creating the The company profile is created when Sage Accpac data files are
company profile
activated. Instructions for creating the company profile are given
under Creating the Company Profile, in Chapter 5 of the System
Manager Administrator Guide.
Certain options in the company profile cannot be changed after it has

been created, while other information in the profile can be changed
as needed. This chapter describes the changes you can make to the
profile on an ongoing basis.
Updating the Company Profile

Double-click the Company Profile icon in the Common Services
folder to update company address or options information.
If security is turned on for your system, you must be assigned to an

authorized user group to maintain or export company profile
information. Ask your system administrator for details.
Tips
Company Profile
Editing the
The company profile is shared by Common Services, Tax and Bank

Services, General Ledger, and by all the subledgers in the company
database.
User Guide 61

What you can For detailed information about each of the entries you can change in
change
the company profile, see Creating the Company Profile, in
Chapter 5 of the System Manager Administrator Guide.
Fields that cannot In the company profile, you cannot change the following fields:
be changed
Database ID.
Multicurrency option if previously selected.
Functional currency.
Changing fiscal If you change the number of fiscal periods, or the quarter with four
periods not
periods for a 13-period ledger, you will not be able to meaningfully
recommended
compare amounts between calendar years that have different fiscal
periods. Your previously printed reports will not be consistent with
future reported data.
How to Use
The Company Profile window has two tabs: Address and Options.
Address tab displays the company name, address, telephone

number, fax number, and contact name.
Address tab

Options tab contains company-wide settings, such as the

number of fiscal periods in your fiscal year, and whether you use
multicurrency accounting.
Options tab
Editing Select the information to change, make changes, then click Save.
Multicurrency If the multicurrency option was selected for the company database,
you can change the default rate type, but not the functional
currency.
Euro option If the multicurrency option was not chosen when the company
database was set up, you can choose multicurrency later; and if EUR
was chosen as the functional currency, you can choose the Euro
option and a reporting currency.
Locked Fiscal You can specify whether to display a Warning, an Error message, or
Period
Nothing when entering transactions in a locked fiscal period.
Inactive G/L This option lets you specify whether to display a Warning, an Error
Account
message, or Nothing when entering a general ledger account
Company Profile
number for an inactive account.

Editing the
Non-existent G/L This option lets you specify whether to display a Warning, an Error
Account
message, or Nothing when entering a general ledger account
number that has not been set up in General Ledger.
User Guide 63

Chapter 7
Using the Fiscal Calendar
Setting Up the Fiscal Calendar ................................................... 71
Maintaining the Fiscal Calendar ................................................. 72
Tips ....................................................................... 72
How to Use ................................................................ 73
Using the Fiscal

Calendar
User Guide 7i


Chapter 7
Using the Fiscal Calendar
This chapter describes the fiscal calendar that Sage Accpac ERP
creates for your company and which you maintain. The fiscal
calendar is shared by all the data in your companys accounting
database.
Setting Up the Fiscal Calendar

Sage Accpac ERP automatically creates the fiscal calendar for a new
company, as follows:
Start of fiscal The starting month and current fiscal year are derived from the
calendar
fiscal year starting date that the system administrator entered
when first signing on to the company. This process is described
in Signing On to a New Company, in Chapter 5 of the System
Number of fiscal The number of fiscal periods and the quarter with four periods
periods
(if a 13-period ledger) are taken from the company profile
created by the system administrator. If a 12-period ledger was
selected, the default dates are calendar months, beginning on the
first day of the starting month. For a 13-period ledger, the
default dates are divided into four-week periods, beginning on
the first day of the starting month.
Leap year If the year is a leap year, February has 29 days.
Security If security is turned on for your system, you must be assigned to

an authorized user group to maintain, import, or export the
fiscal calendar. Ask your system administrator for details.
Using the Fiscal
Calendar
User Guide 71

Maintaining the Fiscal Calendar

Double-click the Fiscal Calendar icon in the Common Services folder
to create a new fiscal year or edit the fiscal calendar.
If you are authorized to maintain the fiscal calendar, you can:
Create a new fiscal year on the calendar.
Edit a fiscal year, including:
Locking periods to prevent accidental posting to them.
Unlocking periods to allow posting to them.
Making a fiscal year inactive to prevent posting to it.
The Locked Fiscal Periods option on the Company Profile Options

tab lets you specify whether to display a warning, an error message,
or nothing when entering transactions in a locked fiscal period.
Tips
Adjustment period The adjustment period is the period to which adjustments, such as
depreciation of equipment, bad debts, and income tax, can be posted
at year-end. The date of the adjustment period is always the last day
of the last fiscal period. For example, if the fiscal year ends on March
31, the adjustment period is one day in length March 31.
Closing period The closing period is the period to which revenue and expense
accounts are closed at year-end. The date of the closing period is the
same as the date of the adjustment period the last day of the last
fiscal period.
Active versus A fiscal year is Active until you change its status to Inactive. You can
Inactive
post to an active year, but not to an inactive one.
Locked versus A fiscal period is Unlocked until you change its status to Locked.
Unlocked
You can post to an unlocked period, but not to a locked one.

How to Use
The Fiscal
Calendar
To add a new fiscal year to the calendar:
1. Clear the Active box for the current fiscal year, then click Save.
2. Click the New button to create a new fiscal year.
3. Click the Add command to add the new fiscal year.
To edit a fiscal year:
1. Select the year you need.
2. To change the status of a fiscal period, double-click the Status

column.
3. Select the Locked or Unlocked option.
Edit period lengths If you need to edit the period lengths to match the dates used by
your company, remember that the ending date for a period must
be one day earlier than the starting date for the next period in all
but the last period.
4. When you have finished making changes, click Save.
5. Click Close to return to the Sage Accpac ERP desktop.

Using the Fiscal
Calendar
User Guide 73

Entering Currency
Information
Chapter 8
Entering Currency Information
Currency Information .......................................................... 82
Maintaining Currency Codes .................................................... 82
How to Add, Delete, or Edit Currencies....................................... 83
Maintaining Currency Rate Types ............................................... 86
Before Using ............................................................... 86
How to Use ................................................................ 86
Entering Currency Rates and Tables.............................................. 87
Before Using ............................................................... 87
Using Currency Rates ....................................................... 88
Creating Currency Tables ................................................... 89
Viewing Euro Conversion Rates ................................................ 813
User Guide 8i


Entering Currency
Information
Chapter 8
Entering Currency Information
This chapter describes the currency information you need for
multicurrency accounting.
Read this chapter if your company enters transactions in more than

one currency, or to add a currency as your functional currency in the
Company Profile that was not included in the System Manager
installation.
When you create a new company database, you can select any of the
currencies provided with the System Manager as the companys
functional currency or you can define a new code if your code
isnt in the list.
If you have more than one company database using the same system
database, each company database can have a different functional
currency.
Define rate types If you are using multicurrency accounting, you must define currency
rate types and tables for all the currencies you use.
Note: Multicurrency is a separate Sage Accpac ERP module.

You cannot choose the multicurrency option unless you
install the multicurrency module.
If you are a member of the European Monetary Union (EMU) see

Viewing Euro Conversion Rates, later in this chapter.
User Guide 81

Currency Information
Currency Information
Currency is a system-wide common service the currency
information is used by all company databases sharing the same
system database. Sage Accpac ERP currency information consists of:
Currency codes.
Currency rate types.
Currency rates and tables.
Euro conversion rates.
Standard currency Standard international currency codes and common currency rate
codes included
types are included with Sage Accpac ERP.
Add new currency If your company uses a currency or a rate type that was not
information
provided with the System Manager, you must add the currency code
or rate type.
Before you can enter transactions in currencies other than your

functional (home) currency, you must define currency tables for each
combination of currency and rate type that you use. You can then
enter and update exchange rates on a day-to-day basis.
Security If security is turned on for your system database, you can only
maintain, import, and export currency information if you have been
assigned to an authorized user group. Ask your system
administrator for details.
Maintaining Currency Codes

Before editing a currency code for a company database, make a list
of all the currencies you use, along with the abbreviation,
description, and format of each. We recommend that you use
standard international abbreviations (for example, USD for U.S.
dollars, and CAD for Canadian dollars).

Entering Currency
Information
If you use any currencies that were not provided with the System
Manager, you need to add them before you start entering
transactions. (See How to Add, Delete, or Edit Currencies, later in
this chapter.)
Euro option If you maintain your books in the currency of a participating country
of the European Monetary Union, you must choose EUR (the
international code for euro currency) as your functional currency
code.
Reporting currency To produce reports in both euro and your national currency, you
select both the Multicurrency and euro options on the Options page
of the Company Profile, then enter your national currency in the
Reporting Currency field.
How to Add, Delete, or Edit Currencies

You use the Currency Codes dialog box to add, edit, and delete
currencies. You may want to add a currency to the list of supplied
currencies, edit an existing currency description, or delete unused
currencies.
The Currency Codes dialog box looks like this:
Currency Codes
Verify installed Click the Finder icon beside the Currency Code field, or press F5 to
information
display a list of all the currencies that were installed with System
Manager.
User Guide 83

To add a currency:
New Code 1. Select the New Code icon beside the Currency Code field.
2. Type a unique currency code of up to three characters in the

Currency Code field.
Upper-case code Lowercase currency code letters are automatically converted to

uppercase.
3. Enter a name for the currency in the Description field.
4. Enter a symbol (such as $ or ) in the Symbol field.
Symbol A symbol can be a character or a standard abbreviation, up to

four characters.
Symbol not on If the currency symbol you need is not on your keyboard, choose
keyboard
Character Map from Windows Accessories, then select the
character you want to insert, or press the keystrokes shown for
the character. For example, to enter the symbol for Japanese yen
( ), hold down the Alt key and press 1, 5, then 7 on your
numeric keypad.
Non-printable If your printer cannot print a currency symbol correctly, enter a

currency symbols
substitute symbol or letter. If you print a report or other
document that includes a currency symbol the printer cannot
produce, unexpected characters may be printed, or there may be
no character printed for the currency symbol, resulting in a
misalignment of amounts on the page.
5. Select the number of decimal places, symbol position, thousands

separator, decimal separator, and negative display format.
Negative display Note that Leading - means that the minus sign is placed before
format
the amount, and Trailing - means that the minus sign is placed
after the amount.
6. Click Add to add your new currency.

Entering Currency
Information
Display format The format in which a currency is displayed in application

windows and on reports is determined by your choice for
number of decimal places, symbol position, thousands
separator, decimal separator, and negative display format.
To edit a currency:
1. Select the currency to edit from the Currency Codes Finder, then
tab from field to field as you make your changes.
2. Click Save to save your changes.
To delete a currency:
Before deleting a currency, make sure the currency is not being used
by another company. If you delete a currency used in your company
database, or in another company database that uses the same system
database, or if you start an application for a company database that
used the deleted currency, the company's currency information will
be damaged.
1. Open the Currency Codes dialog box.
2. Select the currency you wish to delete by entering its code in the
Currency Code field, or by selecting the code using the Finder.
3. Click Delete.
A warning appears when you delete a currency, as shown

below:
4. Click Yes to delete the currency or click No to cancel.
5. Click Close to exit from the Currency Codes dialog box. The next
time you open Currency Codes, the currency you deleted will
not appear in the Finder list.
User Guide 85

Maintaining Currency Rate Types
Maintaining Currency Rate Types

Choose the Currency Rate Types icon in the Currency folder to add,
edit, or delete currency rate types for your system.
Rate types defined Rate types convert source currencies to their functional-currency-
equivalent amounts (for example, you may use different forward
rates for the spot and the 1-month, 3-month, 6-month, and 12-month
future periods).
Before Using
Make a list of all the currency rate types you use and their
descriptions. If you use any rate types that are not included with
Sage Accpac ERP, you need to add them before you start entering
transactions. You also may need to edit information for the installed
rate types if they differ from your own.
How to Use
Currency Rate
Types
Add a rate type For each rate type you want to add, type a unique two-character
code and a description, then click Add.
Upper case type Lowercase rate type letters are automatically converted to
uppercase.
Edit a rate type Select the rate type to change, make your changes, then click the
Save button to save the changes.

Entering Currency
Information
Entering Currency Rates and Tables
Delete a rate type A warning appears when you select a rate type to delete. Make sure
the rate type you wish to delete is not used by another company. If
you delete a rate type used by another company and start an
application for that company, currency information will be
damaged.
To delete a rate type, select its code, then click the Delete button. The
next time you open the Currency Rate Types dialog box, the deleted
rate type will not appear in the Finder list.
Each company When you add a new company that uses multicurrency accounting,
selects a default
you can select any of the rate types you have defined as the
rate type
companys default rate type. If you have created multiple company
databases, each database can have a different default rate type.

Currency Choose the Currency Rates icon in the Currency folder to enter new
Rates
exchange rates, remove outdated rates, and add, edit, and delete
currency tables.
Before Using
Define your currency codes and rate types, and decide on the Date
Matching and Rate Operation methods you want to use. Also, note
the following:
You cannot After entering a rate, you can change the rate and the spread,
change the rate
but not the date. If you have entered a rate with an incorrect
date
date, select the incorrect line from the display area and delete it,
then re-enter the rate with the correct date.
User Guide 87

Enter all the rates You can enter as many dates and rates as you want for each
you need
currency and each rate type. When you are entering transactions
or revaluing currencies for dates on which no rate is entered, the
rate displayed is the rate that most closely fits the date-matching
requirements used with the currency table. You can accept the
rate or type another in place of the rate you selected.
Clear rates often You can clear currency rates as often as you wish. You may
decide never to clear rates unless you are running out of disk
space or the performance of your applications has been affected.
Using Currency Rates

1. Open Currency Rates by double-clicking the Currency Rates icon
in the Currency folder.
Currency Rates
Select a currency 2. Select a currency table using the Currency Tables Finder. (To
table
create a currency table, see Creating Currency Tables.)
Currency Tables
Finder

Entering Currency
Information
Information about the table you chose in the Finder appears in

the columns in the Currency Rates dialog box, as shown next:
Currency Rates
dialog box
Add a new rate 3. If necessary, change the source currency, the rate date, the rate,
and the spread.
4. Click Save.
Delete rates To delete rates, highlight the line that has the rate you want to
delete, then click the Delete button.
Creating Currency Tables

You create currency tables from within Currency Rates.
1. Double-click the Currency Rates icon to open the Currency Rates

dialog box.
User Guide 89

New icon 2. Select the New icon beside the Currency Table field.
Creating currency
tables
3. Using the Finder, select the To Currency for the new currency
table. (This can be the functional currency or another currency.)
4. Using the Finder, select a rate type.
5. Type a description of the table in the Table Description field.
Date matching 6. Select Earlier, Exact, or Later in the Date Matching column. (The
Date Matching method determines the source-currency rate
when no rate has been entered for the date of the transaction or
revaluation.)
Earlier Earlier. The rate displayed will be the rate entered for the most
recent date before the date of a transaction. If there is no rate
entered on an earlier date, you must select from a list of all other
rates entered for the currency. Once you have selected a rate,
you can later change it. If no rates have been entered at all, the
application displays a warning message and you must enter
rates before you can enter the detail.
For example: the functional currency is U.S. dollars, and the

method of date matching is Earlier. On October 7, 2006, you
enter a transaction dated October 8, 2006 in Mexican pesos. Rates
have been entered for Mexican pesos on the following dates:
October 6, 2006; October 7, 2006; and October 11, 2006.

Entering Currency
Information
Since no rate was entered for October 8 (the transaction date),

the application displays the October 7 rate. It is the date nearest
to, and earlier than, the transaction date. Even if you enter the
transaction on October 12, 1999, the October 7 rate is still
displayed, because the rate is selected based on the transaction
date and not on the date of transaction entry.
Exact Exact. The rate displayed will be the rate entered for the same
date as the date of a transaction. If no rate was entered on that
date, you must select from a list of all the rates entered for the
currency. Once you have selected a rate, you can change it, if
necessary.
For example, assume that Exact is the method of date matching,

and that rates were entered on the dates in the previous Earlier
example. Since no rate was entered for October 8 (the transaction
date), you must select from the list of existing rates. Then, if
necessary, you can type another rate in place of the rate you
selected.
Later Later. The rate displayed will be the rate entered for the first
date after the date of a transaction. If a later rate has not been
entered, you must select from a list of all the rates entered for the
currency. Once you have selected a rate, you can change it, if
necessary.
For example, if you enter a transaction dated October 8 and the

method is Later, the October 11 rate is displayed.
Rate operation 7. Select either Multiply or Divide in the Rate Operation column.
(The Rate Operation method determines how the
source-currency amount of a transaction will be converted to its
functional-currency equivalent.)
Multiply Multiply. Select this method to multiply the source-currency

amount by the currencys exchange rate to obtain the
functional-currency equivalent.
User Guide 811

Divide Divide. Select this method to divide the source-currency

amount by the exchange rate for the currency to obtain the
functional-currency equivalent.
Source of rates 8. Enter the reference source from which you will obtain currency
rates, for example, New York Times.
From currency 9. To select a currency, click the Finder in the From Currency table
heading. (This is the currency of the originating entry.)
Rate date 10. Click the Calendar icon to change the date. (This is the date for
which you are entering a rate.)
When Sage Accpac ERP performs a currency conversion during

transaction entry, it first tries to find a rate that has the same date
as the transaction.
If no rate is entered for the transaction date, the date-matching

method you chose for the currency table is the method used:
If you chose Earlier, the rate entered on the most recent

date before the transaction is the rate used.
If you chose Later, the rate entered on the first date after
the transaction is the rate used.
Rate 11. Double-click your cursor in the Rate column to change the rate.
(This is the rate used when converting amounts entered in the
source currency to the functional currency.)

Entering Currency
Information
Viewing Euro Conversion Rates
Spread 12. Enter a figure in the Spread field. (This is the maximum amount
that the rate entered for a transaction can differ from the rate
entered in the currency table, before a warning message
appears.)
When you enter transactions, the application uses the spread to

check that you have entered a reasonable rate. You see a
warning message each time you enter a rate that varies by more
than the spread from the rate entered for the currency. To
change the Spread, double-click in the Spread column.
13. Click Add to save the currency rate table.
Viewing Euro Conversion Rates

Euro conversion rates are fixed at the rate in effect on the date the
country joined the EMU, and cannot be changed. (For example,
conversion rates for the first 11 countries to join the EMU were set at
rates determined on January 1, 1999.)
To view a conversion rate for a currency, and to see the date when
the conversion rate was set:
1. Double-click the Euro Conversion Rates icon in the Currency

folder.
Euro Conversion Rates

dialog box
2. Select a currency code from the Finder.
The Description, Rate, and Effective Date fields will display the
information for that code.
User Guide 813

Chapter 9
Setting Up Optional Fields
Optional Fields
Setting Up
Setting Up Optional Fields in Common Services ................................... 92
Using Optional Tables With Older Sage Accpac Applications ....................... 94
Before Adding Optional Tables .............................................. 95
Adding, Editing, and Deleting Optional Tables ................................ 96
After Adding Optional Tables ............................................... 97
User Guide 9i


Chapter 9
Setting Up Optional Fields
Optional Fields
Setting Up
This chapter describes how to create optional fields. If you have
third-party products that use optional tables or are using version 5.2
or earlier of Sage Accpac ERP products, this chapter explains how to
add optional tables to validate information entered in optional fields
in your accounting applications.
The optional fields feature is available only if you purchase the

Transaction Analysis and Optional Field Creator. This product
replaces Optional Fields and Validation Tables. It requires its own
activation code and is installed like any Sage Accpac module.
License product You must license the Transaction Analysis and Optional Field
Creator before the 30-day grace period ends or the optional fields in
your accounting programs will not be available. For example, if you
open a batch that is already posted, and the 30-day license has
expired, you won't be able to view the optional fields in the batch,
or, if you want to print a transaction listing (which shows posted
data), you will not be able to select by optional field.
Optional fields You use the Optional Fields Conversion utility to allow old optional
conversion
fields to be used in updated programs. If you have optional fields in
your previous program that you do not want converted, you must
turn them off before running the conversion utility. Please see the
Transaction Analysis and Optional Field Creator Installation Guide for
instructions.
User Guide 91

Setting Up Optional Fields in Common Services

Optional fields are set up in Common Services and then added to
each of the applications where you want them used.
You create optional fields using the Optional Fields setup form
in Common Services.
You add the optional fields to the Optional Fields setup form in
each application, then assign them to transactions.
To create optional fields:
There are no limits to the number of optional fields you can create.
However, note that an excessive number of optional fields will slow
down your system.
1. Click the Optional Fields icon in Common Services.
2. Enter an ID code (up to 12 characters) for the optional field, then

enter a description for it (up to 60 characters).
3. Select a type from the drop-down list in the Type field (Text,
Amount, Number, Integer, Yes/No, Date, Time), as described
next:
Text. When you choose Text as the Type, you must also
enter a length (from 1 to 60 characters), and then enter the
text required, with a description, in the Values grid.

Amount. When you choose Amount as the Type, you enter

an amount (defaults to 3 decimal places) and a description in
the Value grid.
Optional Fields
Setting Up
Number. When you choose Number as the Type, you must
also enter a value in the Decimals field (from 0 to 9), and
then enter a value and a description in the Values grid.
The value will automatically have the number of decimal

places you designated in the Decimals field.
Integer. When you choose Integer as the Type, you enter a

value of up to 10 digits, and a description in the Values grid.
(Note that the highest/lowest integer you can enter is
plus/minus 2,147,483,647.)
Yes/No. When you choose Yes/No as the Type, the Values

grid does not appear. You simply enter the optional field
code and a description.
Date. When you choose Date as the Type, you enter a date
in month/day/year format and a description in the Values
grid.
Time. When you choose Time as the Type, you enter the
value in an hour/minute/second format and a description in
the Values grid.
4. Select the Validate option to ensure that users enter into

applications only the values defined for this optional field.
You can select the Validate option for Text, Amount, Date,
Number, Integer and Time types. It is not available for the
Yes/No type.
If you do not select the Validate option, a user can enter one
of the defined values, or enter any other value for that
optional field (including a blank).
If your Type is either Text or Date, and you choose the

Validate option, the option, Allow Blank appears. Choose
User Guide 93

Using Optional Tables With Older Sage Accpac Applications
this option if a blank value is allowed in addition to other

values.
When you select the Validate option, the values you

assigned for that optional field are the only values that a
user can enter in the application.
5. In the Values grid, enter the value and a description that applies
to the Type you chose. (The Values grid does not appear for the
Yes/No type.)
Note that you can enter as many values as you wish for each
type.
The value you enter depends upon the Type you chose. For
example, if you chose Time as the type, then the value field
allows you to enter the hour, minute, and second; and for an
optional Date field, you enter a date in month/day/year
format.
6. Click Add to save a new optional field, or click Save if you

modified an existing optional field.
Note that you cannot modify the optional field type, length, and
decimal places, nor the validation option and the allow blank
option after saving.
Using Optional Tables With Older Sage Accpac

Applications
System Manager lets you maintain optional tables for versions of
Sage Accpac applications that are 5.2 and earlier, and for third-party
products which use similar types of optional fields. The following
sections explain how to create and use optional tables for these
products.
Sage Accpac applications such as Accounts Receivable and Accounts

Payable allow you to add several information fields to customer,

vendor, and invoice records, so, for example, you can add a
membership ID field or specify a warranty type on an invoice.
Optional Fields
When you set up optional fields in each application, you can choose
Setting Up
to link an optional table to an optional field. If you link an optional
table to an optional field, Sage Accpac:
Adds a Finder button to the optional field.
Validates all entries in the field. (That is, an entry in the field is
accepted only if it matches an entry in the table.)
Validate user If you want the system to validate the data that users enter in an
entries
optional field, you must create an optional table and add all the
valid data for that field to the table.
For example, assume you want to add a field called Purchasing

Agent to Accounts Payable and assume that the field is three
characters long. Before users enter data in this field, you must use
the Optional Tables common service to create a table of all the valid
three-character codes for the field. Assume the name of the table is
POAGENT. You then specify, in Accounts Payable, that the
Purchasing Agent field uses the data maintained in the POAGENT
table.
Before Adding Optional Tables

Define optional Define the optional fields you plan to use in your accounting
fields
applications. See the applications User Guide for specific field
instructions.
Decide which field Decide which tables will contain the valid data for the optional
links to which table
fields. You can use the same table in more than one application.
User Guide 95

Adding, Editing, and Deleting Optional Tables

If security is turned on for your system, you must be assigned to an
authorized user group to maintain, import, or export optional tables.
Ask your system administrator for details.
To add an optional table:
1. Double-click the Optional Tables icon in the Common Services

folder.
The following window appears:
2. Type a unique code for the table in the Optional Table field.
In the Maximum Code Length field, type the number of

characters you have defined for the optional field in the
application (1 to 30).
Tab to the column under Optional Table Code, or click once

under the column heading, then type a code. (The code can
include letters and/or numbers up to the maximum characters
length as specified in the Maximum Code Length field.)
Optional table codes are the codes that are valid to enter in a
field which uses this table. The number of characters is
determined by the length of the field in the application.
3. Tab to the Optional Data column and enter a description of the

Optional Table Code data (for example, for a table called
Members, you can create a code labeled Benefits for which the

Optional Data could be Benefits Committee). The description

must not exceed 40 characters.
Optional Fields
Press the Insert key to add each additional code.
Setting Up
Click Close to finish.
The codes in the table are automatically sorted and saved in

alphabetical order.
To edit or delete an optional table:
1. Double-click the Optional Tables icon in Common Services.
2. Select the optional table to edit or delete.
3. To delete the table, click the Delete button, then click Close.
Or
To edit the table, make your changes and then click Close.
After Adding Optional Tables

Define the optional fields in the accounting applications and
specify which optional table each field uses.
When the user enters a code in an optional field, the entry is

verified against the valid codes in the corresponding optional
table.
The user can see all the valid codes for an optional field by
choosing the Finder in that field.
User Guide 97

Chapter 10
Printing
Selecting Your Print Destination ................................................ 101
Selecting Your Printer and Print Options ........................................ 104
Selecting a Printer and Print Options for a Specific Report ..................... 106
Selecting a Printer and Print Options at the Time of Printing ................... 107
Printing
Standard Reports and Business Forms ........................................... 107
Administrative Services Reports ................................................ 108
Assign UI Profiles ......................................................... 108
Customization Directories .................................................. 108
Restart Maintenance ....................................................... 108
Security Groups ........................................................... 108
UI Profile Maintenance Report .............................................. 109
User Authorizations Report ................................................ 109
Users Report .............................................................. 109
Common Services Reports ..................................................... 109
Company Profile .......................................................... 109
Fiscal Calendar ............................................................ 109
Currency Codes ..........................................................1010
Currency Rates ...........................................................1010
Currency Rate Types ......................................................1010
Euro Conversion Rates ....................................................1010
Schedules ................................................................1010
Optional Fields ...........................................................1010
Optional Fields Conversion Listing .........................................1011
Bank and Tax Reports ........................................................1011
User Guide 10i


Chapter 10
Printing
This chapter explains print destination, printer, and print options
and provides an overview of Sage Accpac ERP reports and forms.
Security When security is turned on for your database system, you can
change the print destination only when you are assigned to a user
Printing
group that has been assigned printing authorization.
Selecting Your Print Destination

Sage Accpac offers a number of print destinations. To select or
change a print destination, choose Print Destination from the File
menu, or double-click the current print destination icon in the right
corner of the status bar on the Sage Accpac desktop.
Note that to change print destinations in Order Entry, Inventory

Control, and Purchase Orders, the user must be assigned to a
security group that has been assigned permission to change the print
destination. (Otherwise, the only destination available will be to a
physical printer.)
Web-based For Web-based clients who click the Print button, note that the
printing
Preview screen appears first. You can print from Preview (click the
printer icon), and you can e-mail (for example, you can email A/R
statements and invoices).
The print destinations include:
Printer sends the print job to a printer that you choose either
at the time of the print job or had chosen as the default printer.
Preview displays the report on your computer monitor, at

which point you can choose to print or to export the report.
User Guide 101

File saves the report to a file on your computer. You specify

the name of your usual print file directory.
E-mail sends the report as an attachment in an e-mail (as a

PDF or an RTF file).
You might see the following option:
Messenger Fax This option appears only if you previously

installed ACCPAC Messenger 1.0.
General Ledger The destination you select applies to reports and forms printed
financial
using the Print Financial Statements icon in the Financial Reporter
statements
folder of General Ledger. It does not apply to reports printed using
the G/L Statement Designer.
Preferences You can set an option to receive a message each time you print that
allows you to confirm the destination printer and the page size and
orientation. The option is set in the Preferences dialog box.
Preferences is found in the View menu.
Confirm on Print
If you do not select this option, your print jobs automatically use the
default settings.
Print settings When you select the print destination, you also specify whether you
want to use the page size and orientation (portrait or landscape) that
have been predefined for each report.
You can select a default paper size (letter, legal, or A-4).
Laser printer The defaults are set up for printing to a laser printer. Most Sage
Accpac reports fit on 8" by 11" paper, although you can also choose
to print on paper of A4 size. Setup reports are generally in portrait
orientation, while transaction listings, posting journals, and analysis
reports are printed in landscape orientation.

For information about specific report settings, see the Reports

chapter in the User Guide for each application.
To specify the print destination and print settings:
1. Choose Print Destination from the File menu on the company

desktop. The following dialog box appears:
Print Destination
dialog box
Printing
2. Select a destination from the list. An icon appears in the right
corner of the Sage Accpac desktop status bar, showing your
selection. (Double-click the icon to change the destination.)
Icon Print Destination

Printer
Preview
File
E-mail
3. Select from the following options:
Report Orientation. If you use a laser printer and want to

print each report using its predefined page orientation, select
this option.
Report Paper Size. If you use a laser printer and want to

print each report using its predefined page size, select this
option.
Use A4 in place of Letter. If you use A4 paper, select this

option.
User Guide 103

Selecting Your Printer and Print Options
4. Select a default paper size for reports that can be printed on

Letter/A4 or Legal-sized paper. This default can be changed in
the reports print dialog box, if required.
5. Click OK to save your choices.

Sage Accpac ERP provides three choices for specifying a printer and
print options. (Print options refer to the fields that appear in the Page
Setup dialog box.) You can:
Select the standard (company-wide) printer and print options.
Select a printer and print options for a specific report.
Select a printer and print options for a report at the time of

printing. (Make sure you have selected the Confirm On Print
option in the Preferences dialog box.)
If you do not complete any of the following steps, your default

printer and print options are used.
To select standard printer and print options:
1. Choose Page Setup from the File menu.
Page setup
2. If paper size appears as an option, select the size.
3. Select the paper source.

4. If orientation appears as an option, select Portrait or Landscape

orientation.
5. Select the option, Print On Both Sides (optional).
6. Click the Printer button. The following dialog box appears:
Standard printer
setup
Printing
7. Select a printer from drop-down list beside the Name field.
Click the Network button to change the network printer.
Click the Properties button to view the properties decided

for layout and paper.
8. Click OK (you return to Page Setup, where you can also change
the print destination), then click OK again. The print setup
information is saved for the company desktop. If you then open
a folder and choose the Print command (assuming you selected
the Confirm On Print option in the Preferences dialog box), the
Print dialog box will say Using print setup for: Company
Desktop.
This print setup remains in effect until you clear the setting (and
revert to the company desktop print settings).
To clear the print setup for the item:
1. Select the icon from the company desktop.
2. Choose Restore Defaults from the Object menu, (or right-click

your mouse and choose Restore Defaults from the list that
appears).
User Guide 105

3. In the Restore Defaults dialog box, select the Print Settings

option, then click OK. The print setup for that form is changed
back to the desktop default.
Selecting a Printer and Print Options for a Specific Report

1. Open an item on the company desktop (for example, the Bank
Options report).
2. Choose Print Setup from the File menu.
The Print Setup dialog box appears:
Print setup dialog

box
3. Repeat steps 2 through 4 from the section, Selecting Your

Printer and Print Options, on page 10-4, then click OK.
When you click OK, the print setup information is saved for the
item. If you then choose the Print command from the File menu
or click the Print button, the Print dialog box will display Using
print setup for: Object (itemname) (assuming you selected the
Confirm On Print option in the Preferences dialog box). This
print setup remains in effect until you clear the setting and
revert to the company desktop print settings.
To clear the print setup for the report:
1. Highlight the item on the desktop.
2. Choose Restore Defaults from the Object menu.
3. In the Restore Defaults dialog box, select Print Settings.
4. Click OK.

Standard Reports and Business Forms
Selecting a Printer and Print Options at the Time of Printing

To select a printer and print options at the time of printing, make
sure you have selected the Confirm On Print option in Preferences,
and selected Printer in the Print Destination dialog box, then:
1. Double-click an icon on the company desktop.
2. Choose Print from the File menu.
Printing
3. To select another printer or change the options for this printed
item only, click the Setup button to open the Print Setup dialog
box, make your choices, then click OK.
The first line of the Print dialog box changes to Using Print
setup for: This report only. After you have printed the report,
the setup returns to its previous value.
4. To save your settings, click OK in the Print dialog box.
Standard Reports and Business Forms

Standard Sage Accpac ERP includes a complete set of standard accounting
reports and business forms. To print a standard report or form, you
double-click the report icon, then choose the Print button in the
dialog box that appears.
User Guide 107

Administrative Services Reports
Customized You can also create special-purpose forms or reports for your own
business, and you can customize standard forms supplied with Sage
Accpac (such as customer statements, invoices, checks, credit notes,
mailing labels, and form letters) for your own use.
Note: You can print reports double-sided and collated.
The Common Services and Administrative Services reports

described on the following pages are provided with System
Manager. For information about Tax and Bank reports that are also
provided with System Manager, see the Tax and Bank User Guide.
Administrative Services Reports

You can print reports for the following Administrative Services
items:
Assign UI Profiles
The Assign UI Profiles report lists User ID, the Company ID, and the
Profile ID.
Customization Directories
The Customization Directories report lists user IDs, company names,
and the folder where the customized reports are saved.
Restart Maintenance
The Restart Maintenance report lists the company database ID, the
user ID, program, and filenames of incorrectly-imported records.
Security Groups
The Security Groups report lists the program ID and version, the
Group ID and description, and the resource codes that have been
assigned to all activated programs.

Common Services Reports
UI Profile Maintenance Report

The UI Profile Maintenance report lists the profile ID and
description, the UI key (the form or dialog box), the program ID, the
program version, and the control (field) to hide.
User Authorizations Report

The User Authorizations report lists each user's ID, the company, the
program ID, and the user group ID.
Printing
Users Report
This report lists user IDs, Sage Accpac user names, account type
(User or Timecard) the language preference, authentication method,
Windows domain, and Windows user name.

The following reports are available in Common Services:
Company Profile
This report displays all the choices that were made when you set up
the Company Profile.
Fiscal Calendar
This report shows the fiscal year, and, if the year chosen is the active
fiscal year, the number of fiscal periods, whether adjustment and
closing periods are locked or unlocked; and lists the period start, end
and status (that is, locked or unlocked).
User Guide 109

Currency Codes
The Currency Codes report lists currency codes, descriptions,
symbols and positions, number of decimal places, thousands
separator, decimal separator, and the negative format.
Currency Rates
This report lists functional currency, rate type, source currency, rate
date, rate, spread, date matching, and rate operator.
Currency Rate Types

This report lists rate types and descriptions.
Euro Conversion Rates

This report lists currency codes and descriptions of national
currencies of the members of the European Monetary Union, rates
for converting their currencies to euro, and the dates on which the
conversion rates were set.
Schedules
This report lists schedule codes and descriptions, users who will
receive reminders, user IDs, the number of days ahead that schedule
reminders should be sent out, start and end dates of reminders, and
schedule frequency and their recurring periods.
Optional Fields
This report lists all optional fields information, including names,
descriptions, whether to validate or not, as well as the values
included in each optional field.

Bank and Tax Reports
Optional Fields Conversion Listing

This report prints mapped old optional fields, unmapped old
optional fields, and unmapped new optional fields.
Bank and Tax Reports

For information about bank and tax reports, see the System Manager
Tax and Bank User Guide.
Printing
User Guide 1011

Chapter 11
Checking Data Integrity and
Making Backups
Checking Data Integrity ........................................................ 112
Correcting Data Integrity Errors ............................................ 113
Backing Up Data Before Fixing Errors.................................... 113
Restoring Backup Data ................................................. 114
Backing Up Data .............................................................. 115
Sample Backup Schedule ................................................... 116
Data Integrity
and Backups
User Guide 11i


Chapter 11
Checking Data Integrity and
Making Backups
This chapter gives instructions for checking the integrity of your
Sage Accpac ERP accounting data and for making backups.
Checking data integrity and backing up data are essential steps.
Data can be damaged for a number of reasons. You can physically

damage your hard disk when moving your computer. Power
fluctuations or interference from an electric source (for example, a
thunderstorm) can cause the computer to write data inaccurately.
Files can also be deleted accidentally.
Data Integrity
and Backups
Security If your database system requires security access and you are not the
ADMIN user, you must be assigned to a security group that is
authorized to check data integrity.
Check integrity We recommend that you always check data integrity before backing
before backing up
up your data.
Schedule integrity If you enter a large number of transactions daily, you may want to
checking
start the data integrity check when your business closes for the day.
In that way, you avoid the problem of the integrity checker being
locked out of certain files that are in use at other workstations.
Run first without We recommend that you run the integrity check once without the
fixing errors
Fix option. If errors are reported, back up the data before running
the integrity check again to fix the errors. If the errors cannot be
fixed, then you must restore the data from backup.
User Guide 111

Checking Data Integrity

Select applications 1. Make your selections as follows:
Available Applications. Select one application at a time (either

double-click the application, or highlight it and choose the
Include button), or choose the All button to select all
applications.
Data dependency Order. Select the order in which to check the applications, if, for
example, the integrity of the data in one application depends on
the integrity of the data in another application. To change the
order of the applications to be checked, select one application at
a time and then choose the + or - button to move the application
down or up the list to the desired position.
Fix Minor Errors 2. Choose the option, Fix Minor Errors, if you want errors to be
fixed during the check.
Application 3. For each accounting application that you include, click the
Options button
Application Options button to choose or clear options to be
checked or fixed. For example, for Bank Services, you can choose
bank code ranges, and check or fix the following
Orphan Records.
Restart Recovery.
Banks and Transactions.

Note. The Application Options button is not available for

Administrative Services, Common Services, Tax Services,
General Ledger, and G/L Subledger Services.
Start the check 4. To begin checking data integrity, click the Check button.
A report that lists errors needing to be fixed and minor errors

that were fixed is printed automatically to the print destination
chosen on the Sage Accpac desktop.
5. Examine the report. Check the information against source

documents or data entry control logs.
6. Click Close to return to the company desktop, then correct the

errors. (See next section.)
Correcting Data Integrity Errors
Data Integrity
and Backups
To correct data integrity errors, you must:
Back up the data that contains the errors and store the backup in
a safe place. Do not overwrite an earlier backup.
Run the integrity checker, selecting the Fix Minor Errors option.
If the errors cannot be fixed, restore data from a backup copy.
These steps are described in more detail in the following sections.
Backing Up Data Before Fixing Errors
To back up data before fixing errors:
1. Leave Sage Accpac and Windows, and go to the system prompt.
2. Back up your site data and the data for the company that has
integrity errors.
Shared Data is located in the . . .\SITE, \COMPANY, and

. . .\USER directories. This is data that applies to all your
companies and systems.
User Guide 113

Company data is located in . . .\DATA\companydatabaseID

(or in the directory where the system administrator created
the company database, if the location was not . . .\DATA).
Company data includes the accounting data for all your
company applications, as well as shared company
information like the company profile.
3. If errors occurred in Administrative Services or Common

Services, back up the system data as well. Do not overwrite a
previous backup.
System data is located in . . .\DATA\systemdatabaseID (or in the

directory where the system administrator created the company
database, if the location was not . . .\DATA). System data
includes currency and security information.
Find your data Typically, Shared Data, company, and system data directories are
directories
subdirectories of Sage Accpac or another base directory where Sage
Accpac is installed.
If your current data is damaged and you need to restore data from
an earlier backup, you should first back up the current damaged
data (do not overwrite a previous backup). You will need to give
these damaged files to a technician if you cannot find a backup
containing accurate data.
After backing up the damaged data, delete all the files in the
directories that you are restoring data to. This will prevent any
remaining damaged files from interfering with restored files.
Restoring Backup Data
If you restore backup data to correct data integrity errors, you must
restore correct data to the data directories, then re-enter the
transactions that were entered after the last backup was made.
To restore backup data:

Backing Up Data
If errors occurred in the companys accounting data, change

to the company data directory.
If errors occurred in Administrative Services or Common

Services, change to the system data directory.
Back up the Delete all the files in the directory. Make sure you back up
directory
the directory before deleting the files.
2. Restore backup data to this directory, using your standard

procedure for restoring from backup. Use the last backup you
made before discovering that your data was damaged.
If you are restoring company data, be careful to restore for this

company only.
3. Restart Sage Accpac and choose Restart Maintenance (you must

sign on as the system administrator to use this administrative
Data Integrity
and Backups
service). Delete any restart records that exist for the company
whose data you restored.
4. Check the integrity of the restored data.
If no errors are reported, re-enter transactions to bring the data up

to date. Refer to source documents and reports for transaction
details.
If errors are reported, restore an earlier backup copy of the data,

then repeat this step. If the earlier data has no errors, bring the
data up to date.
Backing Up Data
No matter how large or small your transaction volume, making
regular backups is important. If your data ever becomes damaged,
you will need to use your backup to restore correct data.
User Guide 115

Backing Up Data
Back up to tape, If you have a large accounting system, you should back up your data
disk, or server
to tape, to another hard disk, or, if you are on a network, to another
server. If you back up to a hard disk or server, you may want to
make a copy on tape at regular intervals, such as weekly, and store
the tape offsite. See Sample Backup Schedule, later in this section.
Schedule for Backup utilities, such as those that back up to tape, typically include
backup
a backup scheduler. For example, you may decide to back up your
companys accounting data daily (the files in your company
directory, which is a subdirectory of . . .\DATA), and then do a
complete backup of all files once a week.
If you are an experienced user, you may wish to back up only those
files which have changed. However, we do not recommend this
approach, since restoring data from these backups is more error-
prone.
Do not erase latest Do not overwrite your latest backup, in case any problem occurs
backup
during the backup procedure, or in case the data being backed up
becomes damaged.
Before you begin Before you back up your data, we recommend that you always
check the data integrity and correct any errors found.
To back up all your data:
2. Back up the directories where your site, system, and company

data is stored, using your standard backup procedure.
Sample Backup Schedule

Week 1 Daily. Back up the accounting data for each day of the week
onto a new tape, which is labeled for that weekday, (for
example, Monday, Tuesday, and so on).
Weekly. Store a second copy of Fridays data on a new tape

offsite and date it, (for example, June 5, 2001).

Backing Up Data
Week 2 Daily. Reuse last weeks daily tapes. Back up Mondays data
onto the Monday tape, and so on.
Weekly. Store a second copy of Fridays data on a new tape

offsite and date it, (for example, June 12, 2001).
Weeks 3 to 5 Repeat the daily backup and the Friday offsite backup. (Week 5
is possible when there are 5 Fridays in a month.)
Month end Back up the last day of the month onto a new tape and label it,
(for example, June 30, 2001 Month End). Store the backup offsite.
Next month Repeat the same system, starting with week 1. Reuse the Friday
offsite tapes from weeks 1 through 5 of the previous month. At
month end, back up onto a new tape and store the backup
offsite.
Year end Make two copies of the data and store the copies offsite.
Data Integrity
and Backups
Next year Repeat the same system, starting with week 1. Reuse the
monthly offsite tapes from months 1 through 12 of the previous
year.
User Guide 117

Smug54-12.doc, printed on 4/14/2006, at 11:31:09 AM. Last saved on 4/14/2006 11:30:00 AM.
Chapter 12
Importing and Exporting Data
Data Records ................................................................. 122
Title Records .............................................................. 122
Printing Field Names ...................................................... 122
Using Sample Data ............................................................ 122
Importing Data into Sage Accpac ERP ........................................... 123
Exporting Data From Sage Accpac ERP .......................................... 125
Exporting to an ODBC Database ............................................ 128
Importing an ODBC Database..........................................1214
Exporting in XML Format .................................................1216
Importing an XML File ................................................1217
Using Scripts ................................................................1219
Setting Criteria When Exporting Data ..........................................1220
Viewing Exported Files .......................................................1223
Viewing Data Exported to Excel............................................1223
Viewing Data Exported to a CSV File .......................................1223
Importing and
Viewing Files Exported to Access ..........................................1224
Exporting
Viewing Data Exported to XML ............................................1225
User Guide 12i


Chapter 12
Importing and Exporting Data
This chapter gives step-by-step instructions for importing data into
Sage Accpac ERP and exporting data to other programs from Sage
Accpac ERP.
For information about constructing data files that can be imported,

see accounting application user guides.
File formats You can import or export data in the following file formats:
Excel 2000
Single CSV File
CSV File
Access
Excel 5.0
DBase 5.0
ODBC
XML
Importing and
You can perform the following functions:
Exporting
Save and load scripts. See Using Scripts, on page 12-19.
Change field values (importing only). See page 12-5.
Set criteria (exporting only). See Setting Criteria When

Exporting Data, on page 12-20.
Note that the default entry in the Type field in Import and Export
dialog boxes will always be the most recently-used Type.
User Guide 121

Data Records
Data Records
Files Files are collections of records, each of which consists of fields of
information and title lines.
Single-record data Some data contains only one type of record. Currency codes are an
example of single-record data in Sage Accpac ERP.
Multiple records Other data contains more than one type of record (for example,
Currency Rates has currency rates and table records).
Title Records
Definition Title records specify the names of fields in records, and appear at the
top of a file. If a file has multiple-record types, each type will have
its own title record. For example, multiple records will appear in
more than one worksheet for Excel and multiple CSV files, and in
multiple tables in Access databases. (For more information, see
Viewing Exported Files, on page 12-23.)
Printing Field Names

Use the Display Import Fields command on the Import form (or the
Display Export Fields command on the Export form) to display the
name, type, and length of each field in the record that you want to
import or export. The report also indicates key fields.
Using Sample Data

To see exactly how to format records for importing, we suggest that
you first export records from the sample data that comes with Sage
Accpac ERP applications, specifying the format in which you plan to
import.

Importing Data into Sage Accpac ERP
Experiment with the Sage Accpac ERP sample data or a copy of your
ledger before importing data to a live database, then back up your
data before importing or exporting data.

Importing is the process of copying data from files created by non-
Sage Accpac ERP programs into Sage Accpac ERP.
Note that importing does not erase data in the original file.
To import data into Sage Accpac ERP:
1. Open the Sage Accpac ERP form for the data you want to
import. (In our example, we opened Currency Rates.)
2. Choose Import from the File menu.
The Import dialog box appears.
Import
Importing and
Exporting
Depending on the Type you select, the label of the field beneath
the Type field will change, as shown in the following table:
Type Label
Excel 2000 File
Single CSV File File
CSV File Path
Access Database
User Guide 123

Type Label
Excel 5.0 File
dBase 5.0 Path
ODBC Connection
XML File
The Import dialog box has the following columns:
Record displays the record (or records) that are available

for importing (for example, in Currency Rates, data can be
imported into both currency rates and currency tables
records).
Table displays filenames.
Status displays Import not ready until you choose the

file you will import, then this changes to Import ready.
Field displays field names.
Contents displays field names from the title record. These

are set at Default Value until you select the file to import,
and can be changed back to Default or Default Value.
Data Type displays the type of data (for example, String,

Integer, Boolean, Date/Time, or Float).
Import options 3. Select from the following options:
Insert. Import new records.
Update. Import (overwrite) existing records.
Insert and Update. Import new records and update existing

records.
4. Click the Browse button to specify an Access database or Excel

file; for a CSV import, click the Browse button to specify a path
or filename, for an ODBC import, to specify a connection, and
for an XML import, to specify a file.

Exporting Data From Sage Accpac ERP
For instructions about importing ODBC and XML files, see the
sections, Importing an ODBC Database, and Importing an
XML File, later in this chapter.
You can right-click on cells in the Field column to change values:
To insert a specific entry in a field, select <Value>.
Select <Default Value> if you are importing new records or

updating and not changing records.
5. Click OK to import the file.
A message appears, displaying the number of updates and

insertions, and the number of items processed. (In our example
below, there were zero updates and insertions, and one item
processed.)
Import message
Importing and
Exporting
See the section, Using Scripts, to create scripts that will save you
time when importing.

Exporting is the process of copying Sage Accpac ERP data to files
that can be read and used by non-Sage Accpac ERP programs.
Exporting has no effect on the original Sage Accpac ERP file.
User Guide 125

To export data:
1. Open the form or dialog box for the data you want to export. (In
our example, we opened the Currency Rates form.)
2. Choose Export from the File menu.
The Export dialog box appears, as shown below:
Export
3. Choose a Type (CSV, Excel 5.0, Excel 2000, dBase 5.0, ODBC,
XML, or Access) from the drop-down list in the Type field.
4. Click Browse to choose a file to export to.
To export to Excel, you must first create an Excel file to

export to.
To export to Access, you must first create a database file to

export to.
To export to a CSV program, you must first set up a path to

save the export file in.
To export in XML format, you must first create an XML file

to export to. (See the section, Exporting in XML Format,
later in this chapter.)
To export in ODBC format, you must first create a database

connection. (See the section, Exporting to an ODBC
Database, later in this chapter.

When youve chosen a file, database, etc. to export to, the Export
dialog box looks like this:
Export
Click the plus sign beside each item if there are fields that you
do not want exported, as shown next:
An item not being Key fields

exported
Importing and
Exporting
Note that the items with a star beside the checkmark are key
fields and must be exported.
5. Click OK to begin the export.
To change the criteria for exported data, click the Set Criteria
button before clicking OK. For instructions about setting criteria,
see the section Setting Criteria, on page 12-20.
User Guide 127

When the export is finished, you will receive a message that

displays the number of records exported:
You can view exported files, as described in the section, Viewing

Exported Files, later in this chapter.
See the section, Using Scripts, to create scripts that will save you
time when exporting.
Exporting to an ODBC Database

If this is the first time you will export in ODBC format, you will need
to create an empty database to use for the export. (Be sure to create it
in the database type you use. For our example, we used SQL.)
To export in ODBC format:
1. In the Sage Accpac ERP form that you wish to export data from,
click Export in the File menu.

2. Choose ODBC in the Type field, then click Browse.
The Select Data Source screen appears, as shown below:
New button
3. Click the Machine Data Source tab, then click the New button.
The Create New Data Source screen appears, as shown below:
Importing and
Exporting
4. Select a data source type, then click Next. (For our example, we
selected User Data Source.)
User Guide 129

5. Select a server from the list. (For our example, we selected SQL
Server.)
6. Click Next. The following screen appears:
7. Read the message, then click Finish.

8. Enter a name and description for the data source, then, from the
drop-down list in the Server field, choose a server to connect to.
9. Click Next and choose the connection.
In our example, we chose With SQL Server Authentication

Using a Login ID And Password Entered By The User, and then
typed in a Login ID and a password. (If you are on a network,
your network login ID is the default.)
Importing and
Exporting
10. Click the down arrow to choose the name of your empty SQL
database (which you created in step 1) from the list.
User Guide 1211

11. Accept the other defaults, then click Next to open the following
screen:
12. Click Finish to accept the defaults.
A summary screen appears, informing you that a new ODBC

data source will be created, with the displayed configuration.
13. Test the configuration by clicking the Test Data Source button,
then click OK to close the test screen. (Optional)

14. Click OK.
You return to the Select Data Source screen, with the new Data
Source you created displayed in the list in the Machine Data
Source tab.
15. Highlight the new data source and click OK.
The SQL Server Login dialog box opens.
Importing and
Exporting
16. Enter a Login ID and Password and click OK.
The Export screen reappears, as shown below:
User Guide 1213

You have created an ODBC connection, which appears in the

field now labeled Connection.
17. Click OK to begin the export. You will receive a message similar
to the following:
18. Click Close in the message. You will be returned to the Export
screen.
19. Click OK to return to the original Sage Accpac ERP form.
Please see the section, Viewing Exported Files, later in this chapter.
Importing an ODBC Database
In our example, we import the data created in our sample export.
To import an ODBC database:
1. In the Sage Accpac ERP form that you wish to import data to (for
example, G/L Accounts), click Import in the File menu.
2. Select the type of import, for example, in G/L Accounts, you can
choose:
Basic Account Profile.

Allocation Instructions.
Valid Currency Codes.
Control Accounts Subledger.
3. Click OK.

The Import dialog box opens, as shown next:
4. Choose ODBC in the Type field.
5. Click the Browse button to move to the Select Data Source

screen.
6. Click the Machine Data Source tab, then select the data source
from the displayed list.
7. Click OK.
The logon dialog box appears, as shown next:
Importing and
Exporting
8. Enter your Login ID and Password, then click OK.
User Guide 1215

You return to the Import dialog box. It now looks similar to the
following:
9. Click OK to perform the import.
When the import is finished, a message similar to the following

appears:
10. Click Close to return to the Import dialog box, then click OK to
return to the original form.
Exporting in XML Format

If this is the first time you are exporting in XML format, you will
need to determine a location to export the file to.
To export in XML format:
1. In the Sage Accpac ERP form that you wish to export data from,
click Export in the File menu.
2. Select XML from the drop-down list in the Type field, then click
the Browse button to choose a location.

3. Highlight a folder in which to store the exported file, enter a

filename, and click Save.
You return to the Export dialog box, with the filename and path
appearing in the File field:
4. Click OK to begin the export.
When the export is finished, you receive a message showing

how many files were successfully exported.
5. Click Close in the message to return to the original form.
You can view files you have exported by clicking the filename in the
Windows Explorer. Please see the section Viewing Exported Files,
later in this chapter.
Importing an XML File
In the following XML import example, we import the file we created

in the export sample.
To import in XML format:
1. Click Import in the File menu in the Sage Accpac ERP form that
you wish to import data to.
Importing and
Exporting
The Import dialog box opens, as shown next:
User Guide 1217

2. Choose XML from the drop-down list in the Type field, then
click the Browse button to open the following dialog box:
3. Select the folder containing the file you are importing, and then
highlight the file.
4. Click Open.
The Import dialog box reappears, displaying the file location in

the File field, as shown next:
5. Click OK to begin the import.

Using Scripts
When the following message appears, the import is finished:
6. Click Close to exit the message and return to the original form.
Using Scripts
If you frequently use the same settings when importing or exporting
records, you can save time by creating a script containing these
settings.
To save a script:
1. Open the Import or Export form.
2. Select a file that you often use for importing or exporting, select
an action, (for an import, you can change the values if needed).
(Do not click OK to import or export the file yet.)
Importing and
3. Click the Save Scripts button. The Open dialog box appears.
Exporting
4. Select a directory, enter a file name for the script, and then click
Open.
You return to the Import or Export dialog box.
To use a saved script:
1. Open the Import or Export form you want to import to or export

from (for example, Currency Codes).
2. Click the Load Scripts button.
3. Select a script file, then click Open. You return to the dialog box,
where the values in the script appear in the grid.
User Guide 1219

Setting Criteria When Exporting Data
4. To import or export the data, click OK.

You can set criteria when exporting data from Sage Accpac ERP into
Excel 2000, Excel 5.0, Access, dBase 5.0, ODBC, XML, or CSV
programs.
To set criteria:
1. Perform steps 1 to 4 in Exporting Data From Sage Accpac ERP,

on page 12-6.
2. Click the Set Criteria button.
The following screen opens:
Set Criteria
3. Click the down arrow in the Column field.
A list appears, as shown below:
Select a field
4. Select a field from the list. (Our example uses Table Description.)

5. Click the Add button. The label appears as the heading in the
column next to the Field label, as shown below:
6. Double-click the first cell in the same column (next to the Criteria
label).
Choose a value
7. Click the down arrow to select a value from the list. These values
include:
Value Comment
Importing and
= Equal
Exporting
> Greater than
< Less than
>= Greater than or equal to
<= Less than or equal to
!= Not equal to
LIKE The same as, for example, $
User Guide 1221

8. Click OK. Your choice appears in the second line. Note that our
example includes an entry in the line next to the Or label, as
shown below:
To clear a criteria, highlight the line and click the Clear

button.
To cancel all criteria, click the Cancel button. The Set Criteria
dialog box will close.
To view the Filter, click the Show Filter button. The

following message appears:
Click OK to close the message box.
9. Click OK in the Set Criteria dialog box to accept the criteria and
return to the Export dialog box.
10. You can now click OK in the Export dialog box to perform the
export.

Viewing Exported Files

The following sections explain how to view files you have exported
from Sage Accpac ERP.
Viewing Data Exported to Excel

A file exported to Excel will open in an Excel Workbook. If there is
more than one record in the exported file, more than one Worksheet
will be created in the same workbook.
1. Open Microsoft Excel.
2. Select the file you exported from Sage Accpac ERP.
Importing and
Viewing Data Exported to a CSV File
Exporting
1. Open Notepad.
2. Select the file you exported from Sage Accpac ERP.
User Guide 1223

Viewing Files Exported to Access

A file exported to Microsoft Access will open as a table in a database.
Create database Note that you must create an Access database before exporting data
first
from Sage Accpac ERP.
1. Open Access and create a new database file, then close Access,
writing down the filename. (The extension will be MDB.)
A new Access
database
2. Open the Sage Accpac ERP Export dialog box.
3. Export the data from Sage Accpac ERP as explained in the

section Exporting Data From Sage Accpac ERP, on page 12-6.
4. In Access, open the file you created earlier.
The Sage Accpac ERP data is displayed as new tables:
An Access
database with
data exported
from Sage Accpac
ERP

5. Double-click a table to view the exported data.
Viewing Data Exported to XML

Double-click the XML file in the Windows Explorer. This will open
your Browser, displaying the data that was exported, as shown
below:
Importing and
Exporting
If you wish to modify the XML data file, you need to install an XML
editor utility.
User Guide 1225

Chapter 13
Using Macros
What is a Macro? .............................................................. 131
Setting Security Levels for Macros .............................................. 132
Creating Macros .............................................................. 134
Recording a Macro ........................................................ 134
Before Recording a Macro .............................................. 135
After Recording a Macro ............................................... 136
Before You Start Writing a Visual Basic Macro ................................... 136
Sage Accpac ERP Application Components .................................. 136
Macro Commands Bypass the User Interface ............................. 138
View Objects and Database Commands ...................................... 138
Composite Views ...................................................... 139
Revision Lists ......................................................... 139
View Classes .........................................................1310
Commands for Reading and Updating View Classes .........................1311
View Class: FLAT ....................................................1312
View Class: BATCH ..................................................1313
View Class: ORDERED, DETAIL, SEQUENCED ........................1314
View Class: SUPER ...................................................1315
Filter Expressions in Browse ...............................................1315
xxRPT.INI for Report Information ..........................................1318
Running a Macro .............................................................1319
Using Macros
Adding Macro Icons to Your Desktop ......................................1322

Editing a Macro ..............................................................1325
Editing Visual Basic Macros ...............................................1325
Getting UI and View Information with U.I. Info .................................1326
Creating Dialog Boxes ........................................................1329
User Guide 13i


Chapter 13
Using Macros
This chapter provides an overview of Visual Basic macros, explains
what macros can do, and gives instructions for recording and
running macros.
Browser You cannot record or edit macros when you have Sage Accpac ERP
open in a Web browser, but you can run macros from the browser.
You must record and edit them on the Sage Accpac ERP desktop.
A Web-based client must have the application installed (and

activated) that a macro calls.
Macro security If macro security is set to High, you can only run macros that have
been digitally signed. Note that if you edit a signed macro on a
machine that does not have the third-party digital certificate, the
macro will become unsigned.
Sample macros Included with a Sage Accpac ERP installation are sample macros
that can be used in General Ledger, Inventory Control, Order Entry,
and Purchase Orders.
What is a Macro?
A macro is a file you create that contains a series of commands and
functions to automate a process. Macros help you complete your
Using Macros
work more quickly and efficiently.
Macros are often used to automate repetitive, routine procedures.

For example, you can create macros to print reports from several
accounting applications or perform month-end tasks. You can also
create macros that perform more complex tasks, such as asking for
user input, reading files in other formats, computing amounts, and
User Guide 131

Setting Security Levels for Macros
updating and posting transactions. Macros can also search a

database, compare data from different records, extract data for use
by other programs, and turn on quantities for a range of General
Ledger accounts.
VBA macros You can create Visual Basic macros that you run from VBA-enabled
applications (that is, applications that support Visual Basic macros,
such as Microsoft Word or Excel) to access Sage Accpac ERP data.
These macros are written in the Visual Basic programming
language, and use Sage Accpac ERP objects.
For example, you could run a Visual Basic macro from Microsoft
Excel to load the currency rates from the Internet to your
spreadsheet, and then update the Sage Accpac ERP currency rate
database. See Adding a Non-Sage Accpac ERP Macro to a Folder,
in Chapter 5 of this guide.
To view an example of a Visual Basic macro, refer to the section

Examples of Visual Basic Macros that Use Sage Accpac ERP
Objects, in Chapter 14 of this manual.

The Administrator can set security levels for macros. If the security
level is High, the Sage Accpac ERP desktop and Web desktop will
only run macros that have been digitally signed.
To set macro security:
1. Click the Macros menu, then select the Options command to

open the Macro Options dialog box.

2. Click the Security button to open the Security form:
3. On the Security Level tab, select one of the following levels:
High: Choose this setting when you want only signed

macros to run. (Note that any unsigned macros will be
automatically disabled.)
Medium: When you choose this setting, you will see a

message each time you run a macro that will ask if you want
to run a macro that could possibly be unsafe.
Low: (Not recommended.) You should only select this

setting if you have virus scanning software installed and
only then if you are sure that all the documents you open
will be safe. This setting offers no protection from potentially
unsafe macros.
4. Click OK to leave the Security form, then click Close to exit from
Macro Options.
Each macro opened in Sage Accpac ERP will now be protected by

Using Macros
the security level you have just set.
No certificate Note that if a macro is edited on a machine that does not have the
certificate stored, the macro will become unsigned.
User Guide 133

Creating Macros
Creating Macros
Macros can be created using the following methods:
Recording the series of actions the macro will perform. See the
next section, Recording a Macro.
Editing a macro to remove unnecessary steps or add new ones,

then saving it under a different file name. See Editing a Macro,
on page 13-25.
Complex macros We recommend that you always start a complex macro by making a
manual record of the tasks in it.
Visual Basic To write a Visual Basic macro, you should have a good knowledge
macros
of Visual Basic. To enable a Visual Basic macro to read and write
data through existing Sage Accpac ERP view objects, see Chapter 14,
Writing Visual Basic Macros.
Use a copy of your Remember that when you create a macro that updates your
accounting data
database, you should always work with a copy of your accounting
data or a copy of the sample data, until the macro is fully tested.
Recording a Macro
When you record macros, all application information that the macro
needs is automatically included in the appropriate order.
Tips
Macros record database and report procedures. They record all

operations which update your accounting data. They do not record
movement (mouse action or keystrokes).
Any invalid operations you perform during your recording (such as

entering invalid data) are also stored in your macro. Be sure to edit
the macro to remove the code for the invalid operation, or re-record
your macro.

Creating Macros
Important! Do not save macros in the default macro directory:

C:\Program Files\Sage Accpac\MACROS.
We recommend that you change the default macro directory so that

it is not a subdirectory of . . .\Program Files\Sage Accpac, because if
you ever delete the directory in order to reinstall Sage Accpac ERP,
your macros will be lost. To change the default directory, choose
Options from the Macro menu and select another directory.
Before Recording a Macro
Decide what you want to record. Define in general terms the

procedure to automate. If you are creating a complicated macro,
write out the main steps.
If security is turned If security is turned on for your system, you can record macros only
on
if you are assigned to a user group which is authorized to maintain
macros. Ask your system administrator for details.
To record a macro:
1. From the Macro menu on the Sage Accpac ERP desktop, choose
Start Recording. The following dialog box opens:
Start Recording
2. Complete the following fields:
Macro File. Change the filename. (The last macro recorded

Using Macros
a.
or run is displayed by default.)
b. Record Mode. Choose one of the following options:
Record entries for key fields in the records and for any
fields that you change and save.
Record entries for all the fields in the records.
User Guide 135

Before You Start Writing a Visual Basic Macro
3. To start recording the macro, click OK.
4. Perform the actions to record your macro.
5. When you have finished, click Stop Recording from the Macro
menu. The Visual Basic Project dialog box opens.
6. Edit the macro if needed, then select Close And Return To Sage
Accpac ERP from the File menu.
The macro is automatically saved when you exit.
After Recording a Macro
You should run the macro to make sure it does what you were
expecting. Before you do so, read the instructions in the section,
Running a Macro. To make changes to the macro, follow the
instructions under the section, Editing a Macro.

This section provides background information that will help you
write Visual Basic macros.
Sage Accpac ERP Application Components

To help you understand what macro commands do, this section
gives an overview of Sage Accpac ERP applications.
Sage Accpac ERP applications consist of four main components: user

interface, views, reports, and database.

Each component is a completely separate building block.
User interface The user interface controls the users interaction with Sage
Accpac ERP applications on the company desktop. The user
interface does not directly read or write to the database. In Sage
Accpac ERP documentation, we refer to user interfaces as forms,
windows, or dialog boxes.
Views Views contain most of the accounting logic of Sage Accpac ERP
applications. Views are DLLs (dynamic-link libraries) that read,
write and process data, and make the results available to user
interface programs, import or export programs, macros, and other
functions.
Views are positioned between the user interface and the database.
They isolate the user interface from database access and contain all
database procedures and updates.
Using Macros
Reports Reports bypass views and read the database directly. Reports do not
need the processing logic that views provide.
User Guide 137

Objects Views are sometimes referred to as objects in Sage Accpac ERP. In

Chapter 14, Writing Visual Basic Macros, we refer to objects as
program modules that you can call when writing Visual Basic
macros.
Macro Commands Bypass the User Interface
Macro commands work only with views and reports. The commands
do not go through the user interface.
For example, to update the salesperson in a group of customer

records, the macro does not display the Accounts Receivable
Customers form. Rather, the user will be asked for the old and new
salesperson code, and then to update the customer records.
Macros provide a full programming language and controlled access

to Sage Accpac ERP records and reports.
View Objects and Database Commands

If you record a If you record a macro that reads and updates the database, the
macro
recording supplies the correct view objects and database-update
commands needed by the view.
If you write a However, if you are writing a macro, it is up to you to supply the
macro
view objects and database commands. You need to know that
different types of view objects perform different tasks. In many
cases, they are used with different record structures and
consequently, use different sets of macro commands to perform
database updates.
U.I. Info To view information about user interface controls and the views
associated with each user interface, use the U.I. Info utility. (See the
section Getting U.I. and View Information with U.I. Info, on page
13-26.)

Composite Views
Some application view objects are actually composed of several

views.
As an example, the General-Ledger-batch view object stores

information in three separate views with the object name, followed
by the specific sub-view name:
GLBATCH.batch
GLBATCH.header
GLBATCH.detail
The parts of a composite view are treated the same way as other
view objects. However, as a user, you must keep in mind that the
total record is made up of more than one view, and that you must
update each view (three in the case of General Ledger batches) to
update a complete data record.
Revision Lists
It is important that you understand how the program uses revision

lists.
You can think of a revision list as a temporary file that contains user
changes to the database before the database itself is updated. For
example, when the user adds, deletes, or edits transactions in a
batch, the program will make these changes to records in a revision
list instead of updating the database. When all editing is complete
and the final revision list is posted, the database is updated.
There are two types of revision lists: ordered and sequential. In an

ordered list, a record is identified by a record key. In a sequential list,
Using Macros
a record is identified by a sequence number.
User Guide 139

View Classes
Sage Accpac ERP applications use a variety of view classes (types of

view objects). The classes are described below.
Flat View. A flat view is a view that is not used with other views to
create a complete record structure. A flat view provides access to
individual, independent records. A flat view can have:
Keys with more than one segment.
More than one key.
Set View. A set view is the same as a flat view except that it uses an
ordered revision list. You must call a Post function at the end of any
series of updates, deletions, or insertions to commit the changes to
the database.
Batch / Header / Detail View. A batch/header/detail view consists of

three or more composed views: one batch, one header, and one or
more detail views. Details are kept in an ordered revision list which
is updated when the header is updated.
Browse and Fetch calls to a header view operate only on the current
batch. Browse and Fetch calls to the detail view operate only on the
current header.
During detail editing, the macro can cancel all changes made since
the last header update because detail changes are kept in a revision
list.
Ordered Header / Detail View. An ordered header/detail view

consists of two or more composed views: one header and one or
more detail views. Details are kept in an ordered revision list which
is updated when the header is updated.
A Fetch function returns details for the currently selected header

only.
Detail View. A detail view is the same as an ordered view except

that it allows you to import details without a header.

Sequenced Header / Detail View. A sequenced header/detail view

consists of two or more composed views: one header and one or
more detail views. Details are kept in a sequenced revision list which
is updated whenever the header is updated.
Super View. This class of views carries out a procedure that does not
involve data entry or editing. Generally, these views perform one
task, such as posting, year-end processing, or integrity checking.
The procedure may or may not require some parameters. For

example, to post batches, you may need to set up a family specifying
the type of posting and the range of batch numbers. Once all
parameters are set, you normally call a Process function to carry out
the procedure.
For the object information you require to set parameters, choose

Object Information from the Debug menu in the Macro Developer.
The field names, descriptions, and so on are shown for each super
view, such as GLPOST.
Commands for Reading and Updating View Classes

The following tables list the names and order of Sage Accpac ERP
commands or objects you generally use with each class of view for
browsing, reading, and updating data. For more details on Sage
Accpac ERP Objects for Visual Basic, see Chapter 14.
Use Macro Record The following tables explain the sequence of database commands or
to make sure you
objects used in different types of views. If you use Macro Record to
use the right
commands develop your macro, these commands are automatically added to
your macro when it is recorded. Using Macros
Before you perform any of these tasks, open the view object.
Note the following symbols used in the tables:
n The detail line number (if > 1).
** You can intermix inserting headers and details while updating a

batch.
User Guide 1311

View Class: FLAT
Commands or Objects to Accomplish Task
Task Objects for Visual Basic Macros

Browse View.Read or a combination of
View.Browse and View.Fetch.
Insert View.Init.
View.Insert.
Update View.Read or
View.Browse/View.Fetch to select
record.
View.Update to change fields in
the record.
Delete View.Read or
record.
View.Delete.
Block Update View.Read or
record.
View.Update to perform a group
of updates.
Block Delete View.Read or
record.
View.Delete to perform a group
of updates.

View Class: BATCH

Browse View.Read (batch) or
View.Browse/ViewFetch
View.Browse (header)
loopHeader: View.Fetch (header)
View.Browse (detailn)
loopDetail: View.Fetch (detailn)
goto loopDetail until no more
goto loopHeader until no more
Insert View.Init (batch)
View.Insert (batch)
loopHeader:
View.Init (header)
loopDetail:
View.Init (detailn)
<change variables for details>
View.Insert (detailn)
goto loopDetail until no more
View.Insert (header)
goto loopHeader until no more
Update/ View.Read (batch) or View.
Delete Batch Browse/View.Fetch <change variables for
batch> View.Update or View.Delete
Using Macros
User Guide 1313


Update/ View.Read (batch) or
Delete Header and View.Browse/View.Fetch
Details loopHeader:
View.Read (header) or
View.Browse/
View.Fetch
loopDetail:
View.Read (detailn) or
View.Browse/
View.Fetch
<change variables for detail>
**View.Update (detailn) or
View.Delete (detailn)
goto loopDetail until all processed
<change variables for header>
View.Update (header)
or View.Delete (header)
goto loopHeader until all processed
View Class: ORDERED, DETAIL, SEQUENCED

Browse View.Read (header) or View.
Browse/View.Fetch ViewBrowse (detailn)
loopDetail: View.Fetch (detailn) goto
loopDetail until no more
Insert View.Init (header) <change variables for
header> loopDetail: View.Init (detailn)
View.Insert (detailn) goto loopDetail until all
processed View.Insert (header)

Update/ View.Read (header)

Delete details <change variables for header>
View.Browse (detailn)
loopDetail:
View.Fetch (detailn)
View.Update (detailn)
or View.Delete (detailn)
goto loopDetail until all pro
View Class: SUPER

Start process View.Process
Filter Expressions in Browse

The Browse function (Browse method of the View object in Visual
Basic macros) allows you to set selection criteria for the records it
processes. These selection criteria are called a filter, which appears in
the CmdBrowse command or Browse method as an ASCII string in
the following form:
Formal presentation expression ::= [(...] condition [)...] [Boolean-

of filter syntax operator [(...] condition [)...]...]
where:
condition ::= field-name relational-operator operand
Boolean-operator ::= AND | OR
Using Macros
operand ::= <field-name | constant>

relational-operator ::= > | < | = | <= | >= | != | LIKE
In other words, a filter is a formula which describes one or more

conditions that a record must meet in order to be selected.
User Guide 1315

The formula must be enclosed in quotation marks, like this:

"ACCTTYPE = I AND QTYSW = 1
OR ACCTDESC LIKE %sale%"
Example of G/L In the above example, ACCTTYPE and QTYSW (the quantities
account master
switch) are fields in the General Ledger account master file. The
fields
filter selects account master records based on the contents of three
fields in the record: Account Type, Quantities Switch, and Account
Description.
Since selection criteria expressions are evaluated strictly from left to

right (unless brackets are put in), the expression will be evaluated as:
"(ACCTTYPE = "I" AND QTYSW = 1)
OR ACCTDESC LIKE %sale%"
The expression will select all accounts that contain the word sale
in their description; and will also select all income statement
accounts that store quantities.
To change the order of evaluation, you need to use brackets. For

example:
"ACCTTYPE = I AND (QTYSW = 1 OR
ACCTDESC LIKE %sale%)"
will select income statement accounts which store quantities or

contain the word sale in their description.
Spaces Use spaces to separate field names, operators, and constants in

expressions.
Use two quotation For this reason, if you are comparing a string that includes spaces,
marks around a
you must enclose the string with spaces in a double set of quotation
string containing
spaces marks.
For example:
"ACCTTYPE = I AND (QTYSW = 1 OR
ACCTDESC LIKE ""%Cost of%"")"
makes sure that %Cost of% is treated as a single part of the

expression.

Relational Operators
A relational operator is a symbol that shows how two items are

compared. For example, the equal sign (=) is a relational operator.
You can have any of the following operators in a filter expression:
< less than

<= less than or equal to
= equal to
>= greater than or equal to
> greater than
!= not equal to
LIKE contains
All relational operators work with all field types except for switches
(like QTYSW), where only the = and != operators apply.
LIKE The LIKE operator is similar to the = operator, except the second
operand can contain the wildcards % and _.
% matches any group of characters.
_ matches any single character.
So ACCTDESC LIKE %sale% is true for any accounts with

descriptions that include the word sale. This would include Sales
of product B, as well as Cost of sales.
AND and OR Operations
AND and OR are used to combine conditions. If AND is used to

combine two record selection conditions, both conditions must be
met before a record can be selected. If OR is used to combine two
Using Macros
record selection conditions, either condition can be met.
User Guide 1317

In the following example, records must be account type I and must

have the quantity switch turned on to be selected.
"ACCTTYPE = I AND QTYSW = 1
If you use OR, however, the program will select all records of
account type I, as well as all records with the quantity switch
turned on.
"ACCTTYPE = I OR QTYSW = 1
xxRPT.INI for Report Information

The xxRPT.INI file, located in the applications program directory,
defines various options for each of the applications reports. The xx
is a two-character code which identifies the application. For example,
the following partial listing of the ASRPT.INI contains information
for Administrative Services reports:
[ASUSER]
heading=6000
crystal=as3000
type=datapipe
orientation=portrait
paper size=1
optparams=2
2=PATH SITE
3=EXT FILEEXT
datapipe query=a4wudp.dll=a4wudp.dll
datapipe path=..\
[ASORGLIST]
heading=6007
crystal=asorgs
type=datapipe
paper size=1
datapipe query="a4wodp.dll=a4wodp.dll"
datapipe path=..\
[ASSEC]
heading=6001
crystal=as2000
paper size=1
optparams=2
2=PATH SYSTEM
3=EXT FILEEXT

Running a Macro
[ASAUTH]
heading=6002
crystal=as1000
paper size=1
optparams=2
2=PATH SYSTEM
3=EXT FILEEXT
Each report entry contains:
The name (heading) that will appear in the title bar of the report
window. For example, 6000 is Users.
The report definition filename and default orientation and paper

size.
The number of optional parameters in the report.
The path (directory) and file extension to the data.
The report entry may also specify the type, name, and path of
database interface used for the report.
Running a Macro
Work with a copy If you are creating a macro that updates your database, test the
of your data
macro first with a copy of your accounting data.
To make a copy of your accounting data, use the DBDump and

DBLoad features of Sage Accpac ERP. See Appendix J in the System
Manager Administrator Guide for instructions.
Digitally signed You can digitally sign your macros and then set a High macro
macros
Using Macros
security level so that only digitally signed macros will run. (See the
earlier section, Setting Security Levels for Macros.)
You can run a Visual Basic macro to access Sage Accpac ERP data
from a VBA-enabled application (such as Microsoft Word or Excel),
or you can run macros created in Sage Accpac ERP, to be run from a
Sage Accpac ERP application.
User Guide 1319

Running a Macro
See the section Adding a Macro to a Folder, in Chapter 5 of

this guide for information about VBA and CA-BLE macros
created and run in Sage Accpac ERP. Also see the next section,
Adding Macro Icons to Your Desktop.
See the section Adding a Non-Sage Accpac Macro to a Folder,

in Chapter 5 of this guide for information about VBA macros
created in Sage Accpac ERP that will run from another VBA-
enabled program (for example, from Excel). Also see the next
section, Adding Macro Icons to Your Desktop.
Be sure that your VBA-enabled application is set for the following:
Reference ACCPAC COM API Object 1.0. (In the Visual Basic
Editor, choose the Tools menu and then References. Select the
option ACCPAC COM API Object 1.0.)
If you are running VBA from Sage Accpac ERP, this selection
is automatic.
Gain access to the directory containing your Sage Accpac ERP

programs (normally C:\Program Files\Sage Accpac\Runtime).
To gain access, include the path in your Autoexec.bat file.
If you are running VBA from Sage Accpac ERP, this is done
automatically.
Steps to run a The following instructions describe how to run a macro. We have
macro
used the Euro Rounding Difference macro as a sample. (This macro
lets you specify the general ledger account to which rounding
differences will be debited or credited, and then creates adjustment
entries for the EMU currencies that had transactions with rounding
differences.)
To run a macro from the macro menu:
1. On the Sage Accpac ERP Macro menu, click Run.
The Run Macro dialog box appears.
2. Select Sage Accpac ERPs Macros folder (for example,

C:\Program Files\Sage Accpac\Macros).

Running a Macro
3. From the Files Of Type list, select VBA Macro.
4. Select a macro file (for example, wroffeur.avb).
5. Click Open.
6. Perform any required steps (in our sample, we enter the general
ledger account to which the rounding differences will be debited
or credited).
7. Click OK. (Our sample macro creates an adjustment batch for

each EMU currency.)
8. Continue with any steps required to complete the procedure.
To run the macro from your desktop:
1. Double-click the icon that you placed on the desktop. (For

instructions on creating icons for macros, see the next section,
Adding Macro Icons to Your Desktop.)
2. Perform any required steps (in our sample, we enter the general
ledger account to which the rounding differences will be debited
or credited).
3. Click OK. (Our sample macro creates an adjustment batch for

each EMU currency.)
4. Continue with any steps required to complete the procedure.
If there are problems running a macro you have created, click

Macro/Edit from the menu bar, choose the macro that has problems,
and make changes. For instructions, see Editing a Macro, later in
this guide.
Using Macros
User Guide 1321

Running a Macro
Adding Macro Icons to Your Desktop

You can add an icon to your company desktop for each macro you
create, where they will be easily accessible for use. You can also add
an icon for a macro that will run from another program.
Microsoft Windows If your macro fails to download to your computer when running
2003 note
Sage Accpac ERP on the Web, ask your Administrator if the AVB
extension has been added as a MIME type.
In Microsoft Windows 2003, Internet Information Services has a

feature in which the extensions of all files that are to be served must
be specified. Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications macro files have
the extension AVB. Therefore, in order for a macro created in Sage
Accpac ERP to download over the Web, the IIS Administrator must
add AVB as a MIME type. If this is not done, the macro will fail to
download to client computers.
To add an icon for an .avb macro to your desktop:
1. Highlight the program folder where the macro will be used. (For
example, highlight Accounts Receivable to add an icon for an
Accounts Receivable procedure.)
2. On the Object menu on the company desktop, click New, then

click Macro.
3. Enter a title for the macro.
4. Select the All Users option to allow every user of this database to
run this macro.
5. Click Next.
6. Click Browse in the Macro File field. The folder where your Sage
Accpac ERP macros are stored will appear. Make sure that VBA
macros is chosen in the Files of Type field.
7. Select the macro from the list.
8. Click Open.

Running a Macro
9. Select the Display on Web Desktop option if you want the macro
icon to be available from the Sage Accpac ERP Web desktop.
Note. VBA macros created in System Manager 5.0 or later

are the only macros that appear on the Sage Accpac ERP
Web desktop.
10. Check that the default macro URL is correct.
11. Click Finish.
The macro appears on the Sage Accpac ERP desktop and/or on

the Sage Accpac ERP Web desktop.
Macro icon on
desktop
To add an icon for a macro that will open another program:
1. Highlight the program folder where the macro will be used. (For
example, highlight Accounts Receivable to add an icon for an
Accounts Receivable procedure that will be run from Excel.)
2. On the Object menu on the company desktop, click New, then

Program.
Using Macros
3. Enter a title for the macro.
4. Select the All Users option to allow every user of this database to
run this macro.
5. Click Next.
User Guide 1323

Running a Macro
6. In the Command field, enter the location and name of the

program, such as C:\Program Files\Microsoft Office\
Office\Excel.exe.
7. In the Arguments field, enter the location and the name of the
macro file. Use quotation marks around the entry (for example,
C:\Program Files\Sage Accpac\Runtime\GIFI.xls).
8. Enter the Working Directory, such as c:\Program Files\

Sage Accpac\Runtime (or click the Browse button to find the
folder).
9. Click Finish.
An icon appears on your Sage Accpac ERP desktop for the macro.
Icon to open
macro in Excel
When you double-click the icon, the program you specified in the
Command field opens (for example, Excel), then the macro you
specified in the Arguments field runs.
An example of this type of icon could be adding an icon for the

GIFI.xls sample macro. Then when you double-click the icon on the
Sage Accpac ERP desktop, Excel opens, the GIFI.xls macro runs,
creating a report of GIFI codes.

Editing a Macro
Editing a Macro
You may want to enhance your macros functionality. You can do
this by selecting Macro/Edit in the Sage Accpac ERP desktop.
Note. You cannot record and edit macros in your Web-based

Sage Accpac ERP desktop.
Editing Visual Basic Macros

Edit only up-to- Be sure the macro you are editing is current and up to date. Note
date macros
that an older XAPI macro CANNOT be converted to a COMAPI
macro.
Edit a macro as you would a Visual Basic program. For example, you
can add forms on which you insert standard controls, such as
buttons or edit boxes, or add ActiveX controls, such as a UI object.
To edit a macro:
1. Select Macro/Edit from the menu bar.
2. Choose the macro you wish to change.
The Visual Basic Project window opens, displaying your macro

in code format.
3. Make changes to the code as needed.
4. Save your changes and exit from the editor.
Online information While using the Visual Basic Editor, you can retrieve online
about Sage
information about the Sage Accpac ERP objects used in Visual
Using Macros
Accpac objects
Basic macros, as outlined next:
5. From the Tools menu, choose References. Select the option,

ACCPAC COM API Object 1.0.
6. From the View menu, choose Object Browser.
7. From the list of libraries, choose ACCPAC COMAPI.
User Guide 1325

Getting UI and View Information with U.I. Info
For full instructions on using the Visual Basic Editor, refer to your
Visual Basic Editor manual.

The U.I. Info utility provides information on user interface controls
and on the views associated with each user interface. This
information is especially useful when you write macros.
You will need the ID for the user interface for which you want
information. To get an ID, go to Object/Properties.
We will take the following steps to get the ID for the Banks UI:
1. Right-click the Banks icon on the Sage Accpac ERP desktop, and
choose Properties.
As shown below, the ID for Banks is BK1001.
Banks ID
2. Record the ID number (you need it for the U.I Info utility), then
click Cancel to exit the Banks Properties dialog box.
3. Leaving Sage Accpac ERP open, perform the following steps:

To use U.I. Info:
1. To start the U.I. Info utility, choose U.I. Info from the Sage
Accpac Tools menu in the Windows Start list.
Note that Sage Accpac ERP must be running in order to use

the U.I. Info utility.
You can also start U.I. Info by double-clicking

AccpacInfo.exe in the Runtime directory.
For our example, we will open the BK folder in the right pane,
then look for BK1001 in the folder list (the ID we found in the
previous steps).
2. Right click BK1001, and choose Get Info.
Using Macros
User Guide 1327

When you choose Get Info, the columns fill with data, as shown
below:
If you choose Properties instead of Get Info when you right-click

BK1001, a screen displaying the OCS filename and the Class ID
appears:
3. In the Get Info display, right-click rows that have DS in the

Type column, then click the Get View Info option to see a screen
showing all view fields, along with descriptions, sizes, and
attributes for that item, as shown below:

Creating Dialog Boxes
The Accpac ViewInfo screen displays information for the view

you selected (in our example, for BK1001), and also lets you scan
other views without having to return to the U.I. Info screen to
choose another view (you just click another user interface ID in
the left-hand pane).
Creating Dialog Boxes

For use with Visual To create dialog boxes for use with VB macros, refer to your Visual
Basic macros
Basic manual for information on user interface design.
Using Macros
User Guide 1329

Chapter 14
Writing Visual Basic Macros
Digitally Signing Macros ....................................................... 141
What is the Sage Accpac Object Model? ......................................... 143
Using Sage Accpac Objects ..................................................... 144
The Object Hierarchy ...................................................... 144
Using the Objects in a Program ............................................. 145
Sage Accpac Objects by Function ............................................ 146
Error Handling................................................................ 147
Terminology Used in This Chapter .............................................. 147
Examples of Visual Basic Macros that Use Sage Accpac Objects .................... 148
The Sage Accpac Objects ......................................................1414
AccpacApplication ...........................................................1415
AccpacCompany .............................................................1416
AccpacCurrency .............................................................1419
AccpacCurrencyRate .........................................................1421
AccpacCurrencyTable ........................................................1422
AccpacDBLink ...............................................................1424
AccpacFiscalCalendar ........................................................1431
AccpacMultiuser .............................................................1437
AccpacOrganization ..........................................................1443
AccpacPrintSetup ............................................................1444
AccpacProperty ..............................................................1445
AccpacReport ................................................................1448
AccpacSession ...............................................................1454
AccpacView .................................................................1483
AccpacViewField.............................................................1496
AccpacViewKey............................................................ 14101
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 14i

Collections ................................................................. 14102

AccpacActiveApp (Collection) ............................................... 14102
AccpacErrors (Collection).................................................... 14103
AccpacOrganizations (Collection) ............................................ 14107
AccpacViewCompositeNames (Collection) .................................... 14110
AccpacViewFieldPresentsStrings (Collection) .................................. 14111
AccpacViewFields (Collection) ............................................... 14113
AccpacViewKeys (Collection) ................................................ 14114
14ii Sage Accpac System Manager

Chapter 14
Writing Visual Basic Macros
This chapter introduces you to the Sage Accpac object model that
you can use when writing Visual Basic macros that access Sage
Accpac ERP databases. Visual Basic macros can be run in Sage
Accpac ERP or from other VBA-enabled applications (that is,
applications such as Microsoft Office that support Visual Basic).
You should already have a good knowledge of Visual Basic concepts,

terminology, and syntax. For a short glossary, see Terminology
Used in This Chapter, on page 14-7.
You should also have read Before You Start Writing a Visual Basic
Macro, in Chapter 13 for background information on topics such as
views and filters.
Macro security You can digitally sign Sage Accpac macros. See the next section for
information.
Digitally Signing Macros

You can digitally sign your macros after obtaining an authenticated
digital certificate. You must import the certificate for use in VBA,
and then choose it in the Digital Signature dialog box.
1. Get your certificate from the third party provider (for example,
Verisign or Thawte).
2. Go to Microsofts download site, and enter as the keyword,

PVK Digital Certificate Files Importer.
3. Click the link to download the PVK Import utility to your

computer.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 141

Digitally Signing Macros
4. Run the utility on your computer to allow your certificate to be

used in your Sage Accpac macros.
5. Open Sage Accpac ERP.
6. Open a macro in the macro editor.
7. In the Visual Basic for Applications Editor, select Tools from the
menu bar, then select the Digital Signature command.
8. Select the certificate required for this macro.
9. After signing your macro, save it, exit and then re-edit to verify
that the signature is still there.
Set security level You can set security levels for your macros. To run only those that
have been digitally signed, set the level to High. See Chapter 4,
Setting Up Databases in the System Manager Administrator Guide
for instructions on setting security levels.
No certificate Note that if a macro is edited on a machine which does not have the
certificate stored, the macro will become unsigned.
Embedded UI If your macro contains an embedded Sage Accpac UI, see the Sage
Accpac SDK Programming Guide for instructions on digitally signing
your Sage Accpac UI control.
Open the UI before The embedded UI has to be downloaded on the Sage Accpac
running a macro in
Web desktop before you run the macro. For example, if you
which it has been
embedded have a macro that is designed to import customers, you must
first open the Customers UI and only then run the macro. If a UI
has not been downloaded, the macro cannot run.
If UI changes If a macro has an embedded UI, and that UI changes (via a

Service Pack release, or a new version installation), then in
addition to updating the macro to replace the UI control with the
new version, if you tried to run the old macro, you may notice
that it will no longer run. In order to run the macro (with the
new embedded UI), you will have to delete the VBA-created <UI
control name>.exd file from your machine. (You can simply

What is the Sage Accpac Object Model?
search for all *.exd files and delete them, as the files are recreated
the next time a macro is run.)
What is the Sage Accpac Object Model?

The Sage Accpac Object Model is the collection of programmable
objects that form the COM (Component Object Model) interface to
System Manager. These objects that can be used in Visual Basic,
Visual C++, VBScript, Java and any platform that supports COM.
Macros and full-fledged UIs both use this object model.
Because the Sage Accpac Object Model was designed especially for
use with Visual Basic, this chapter focuses on how to use the objects
in Visual Basic programs only.
The Sage Accpac Object Model consists of objects and collections,

including the ones shown in the following table.
Objects Collections
AccpacView AccpacActiveApp
AccpacApplication AccpacErrors
AccpacCompany AccpacOrganizations
AccpacCurrency AccpacViewCompositeNames
AccpacCurrencyRate AccpacViewFieldPresentsStrings
AccpacCurrencyTable AccpacViewFields
AccpacDBLink AccpacViewKeys
AccpacFiscalCalendar
AccpacMultiuser
AccpacOrganization
AccpacPrintSetup
AccpacProperty
AccpacReport
AccpacSession
AccpacViewField
AccpacViewKey
Most collections contain a Count property and an Item method.

Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 143

Using Sage Accpac Objects

You can use the Sage Accpac objects when writing Visual Basic
macros to gain access to a Sage Accpac ERP database. The Sage
Accpac objects simplify data retrieval and maintenance. The objects
contain properties, methods, or both. You simply need to know what
to send to the object, and what the object returns.
The Object Hierarchy

The Sage Accpac objects exist in a hierarchy all objects, except
AccpacSession, exist within other objects. This means that you have
to access the AccpacSession root object before accessing any of the
other objects.
The following illustration shows the hierarchy of the objects.

Using the Objects in a Program

You use the Sage Accpac objects in your Visual Basic program in the
following sequence:
1. Create the AccpacSession object. For example:

Dim Session As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacSession
Set Session = CreateObject(Sage Accpac.Session)
2. Open a Sage Accpac session by using the Open method of the

AccpacSession object. You must do this before you can call any
of the other objects. For example:
Session.Open ADMIN, PASS, SAMLTD,
Date, 0,
Where:
ADMIN = User Identifier

PASS = User Password (in all capital letters)
SAMLTD = The code identifying the database
Date = The date of the session
0 = Flags (For future use. Set to zero for now.)
= Reserved (For future use. Set to empty string for
now.)
3. You can now call other objects to retrieve information or to

change the database.
To retrieve currency information:
Use the GetCurrency method of the AccpacSession

object. This returns an AccpacCurrency object. You can
access the properties and methods of the
AccpacCurrency object to get currency information.
To retrieve company information:
Use the OpenDBLink method of the AccpacSession

object. This returns an AccpacDBLink object, which
represents a link to the database.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 145

From the AccpacDBLink object, use the GetCompany

method to retrieve an AccpacCompany object. You can
access the properties of the AccpacCompany object (for
example, the Name property) to get company
information.
To retrieve database field information and to change the

database:
Use the OpenDBLink method of the AccpacSession

object. This returns an AccpacDBLink object, which
represents a link to the database. From the
AccpacDBLink object, use the OpenView method. This
returns an AccpacView object.
From the AccpacView object, you can retrieve

information about:
The fields of the view (by using the Fields property

of the AccpacView object).
The keys of the view (by using the Keys property of

the AccpacView object).
To get information about the way a field or a key is

presented, use the PresentationStrings property of the
AccpacViewField object to call the
AccpacViewFieldPresentsStrings object.
You can also change the database by using a number of

methods on the AccpacView object, such as Delete,
Insert, and Update.
4. To print reports, use the ReportSelect method of the

AccpacSession object. This returns an AccpacReport object. You
can use the AccpacReport objects properties and methods to
print reports.
Sage Accpac Objects by Function

The following table categorizes the objects by function:

Error Handling
To do this Call these objects or collections

Retrieve information about the AccpacActiveApp
application AccpacApplicatio
Retrieve information about the AccpacCompany
company
Retrieve information about the AccpacCurrency
currency AccpacCurrencyRate
AccpacCurrencyTable
Retrieve information about errors AccpacErrors
Retrieve information about a field AccpacViewField
AccpacViewFields
AccpacViewFieldPresents
Strings
Retrieve information about the key AccpacViewKey
of a view AccpacViewKeys
Set up and print reports AccpacReport
Open a session or a view AccpacSession
Retrieve information from the AccpacView
database or maintain the database
Retrieve information about the AccpacViewCompositeNames
subviews that constitute a view
Error Handling
You should include the On Error statement in the Visual Basic
program. The On Error statement evaluates the error codes, and
performs the error routine that you specify in the Visual Basic
program.
You can use the AccpacErrors collection object in the error routine to
further evaluate errors. For an example of error handling, see the
section Examples of Visual Basic Macros that Use Sage Accpac
Objects, later in this chapter.
Terminology Used in This Chapter

Collection. An object that contains a group of related objects or
items. For example, the AccpacViewFields collection contains several
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 147

Examples of Visual Basic Macros that Use Sage Accpac Objects
AccpacViewField objects, whereas the AccpacViewCompositeNames

collection returns several composite names. To reference one of the
objects or items in a collection, you need to set an index value
(usually a number, or in some cases, a name).
Methods. Actions that the object can perform.
Object. Contains properties that you can retrieve or methods that

you can call. Several objects can be returned in one collection (see
Collection).
Parameters. Items you send with a property or method to the

object, that further identify what you want done.
Properties. Values that you can set and send to an object, or values
that you can retrieve from an object. Properties may also return
objects. For example, the Errors property of the AccpacSession object
returns the AccpacErrors object.
Constant. The name you assign to a value that does not change
during program execution.
Examples of Visual Basic Macros that Use Sage

Accpac Objects
Example 1 The following sample macro uses the AccpacReport object to print
the G/L Options report. Note that the code calls methods of the
implicitly created global AccpacSession object.
Sage Accpac Macro file: D:\a4w\MACROS\gloptions.avb
Recorded at: Mon Sep 16 10:09:25 2010

On Error GoTo ACCPACErrorHandler
Dim mDBLinkCmpRW As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacDBLink

Set mDBLinkCmpRW = OpenDBLink(DBLINK_COMPANY,
DBLINK_FLG_READWRITE)
Dim mDBLinkSysRW As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacDBLink

Set mDBLinkSysRW = OpenDBLink(DBLINK_SYSTEM,

Dim rpt As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacReport

Set rpt = ReportSelect("GLOPT01", " ", " ")
Dim rptPrintSetup As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacPrintSetup
Set rptPrintSetup = GetPrintSetup(" ", " ")
rptPrintSetup.DeviceName = "DOC-Laser"
rptPrintSetup.OutputName = "\\603wps01\doc-laser"
rptPrintSetup.Orientation = 10
rptPrintSetup.PaperSize = 300
rptPrintSetup.PaperSource = 7
rpt.PrinterSetup rptPrintSetup
rpt.NumOfCopies = 1
rpt.Destination = PD_PREVIEW
rpt.PrintDir = ""
rpt.PrintReport
Exit Sub
ACCPACErrorHandler:
Dim lCount As Long
Dim lIndex As Long
If Errors Is Nothing Then
MsgBox Err.Description
MsgBox "VBA Macros cannot run where Accpac is deployed
as a Web Server"
Else
lCount = Errors.Count
If lCount = 0 Then
Else
For lIndex = 0 To lCount - 1
MsgBox Errors.Item(lIndex)
Next
Errors.Clear
End If
Resume Next
End If
End Sub
The macro defines and creates the AccpacReport object, and uses it
to print the report, using the following settings:
If the program encounters an error, the On Error statement tells

the program to perform the procedure specified by the
ACCPACErrorHandler subroutine.
Uses the implicitly created global AccpacSession object to select

the G/L Options report (GLOPT01).
Specifies that the report be printed at a printer destination,

specifies that one copy of the report be printed.
ACCPACErrorHandler is the error subroutine that the program

performs when an error is encountered.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 149

Errors.Count contains the number of errors related to the Sage

Accpac objects.
If Errors.Count is 0, then the error encountered is related to

Visual Basic (not Sage Accpac ERP), and the program
displays the error description stored in Visual Basics
Err.Description object.
If Errors.Count is not 0, then the error encountered is related

to Sage Accpac ERP. The program then displays each an
error description string called Errors.Item in the Errors
collection.
Errors.Clear (that is, the Clear method of the AccpacErrors

collection) then clears the error conditions.
Example 2 The following macro adds the currency code NZD to the Sage
Accpac ERP database:
Sub MainSub()

Sage Accpac Macro file: D:\a4w\MACROS\curnzd.avb
Recorded at: Wed Oct 09 09:16:28 2010

On Error GoTo ACCPACErrorHandler
Dim mDBLinkCmpRW As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacDBLink

Set mDBLinkCmpRW = OpenDBLink(DBLINK_COMPANY,

Set mDBLinkSysRW = OpenDBLink(DBLINK_SYSTEM,
Dim CSCURCODES1 As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacView

Dim CSCURCODES1Fields As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacViewFields
mDBLinkSysRW.OpenView "CS0003", CSCURCODES1
Set CSCURCODES1Fields = CSCURCODES1.Fields
CSCURCODES1Fields("CURID").Value = "NZD"
Currency Code
CSCURCODES1Fields("CURNAME").PutWithoutVerification "New
Zealand Dollar" Description
CSCURCODES1Fields("SYMBOL").PutWithoutVerification "$"
Symbol

CSCURCODES1Fields("DECIMALS").PutWithoutVerification "2"
Decimal Places
CSCURCODES1Fields("NEGDISP").PutWithoutVerification "3"
Negative Display
CSCURCODES1.Insert
Exit Sub
ACCPACErrorHandler:
Dim lCount As Long
Dim lIndex As Long
If Errors Is Nothing Then

MsgBox "VBA Macros cannot run where Sage Accpac
is deployed as a Web Server"
Else
lCount = Errors.Count
If lCount = 0 Then
Else
For lIndex = 0 To lCount - 1
MsgBox Errors.Item(lIndex)
Next
Errors.Clear
End If
Resume Next
End If
End Sub
The macro settings are:
If the program encounters an error, the On Error statement tells

the program to perform the procedure specified by the
ACCPACErrorHandler subroutine.
Uses the implicitly created global AccpacSession object to open

an AccpacDBLink (database link) object, and assigns the
AccpacDBLink object to mDBLinkSysRW.
Calls the AccpacView object, opens the view CS0003 using the
mDBLinkSysRW AccpacDBLink object, and assigns the
AccpacView object to CSCURCODES1.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1411

Assigns the Fields property of the AccpacView object.
Puts values in the view fields, without verifying the integrity of

the values.
Uses the Insert method of the AccpacView object to add the

record for currency code NZD.
ACCPACErrorHandler is the error subroutine that the program

performs when an error is encountered.
Example 3: An example of a more complex macro is Getrate.avb, installed

Getrates.avb
with Sage Accpac ERP. This macro retrieves exchange rates from the
Pacific Exchange Rate Service and updates your currency rates
database.
To run the Getrates macro:
1. From the Macro menu on the Sage Accpac desktop, click Run.
2. Choose VBA Macro from the Files of Type field (if this is not the
default).
3. Select GETRATES.AVB from the list of available macros.
As the spreadsheet with the latest rates loads into Excel, you will
see a message on the Excel status bar that the macro is retrieving
currency rates, and when retrieval is finished, another message
shows that a currency rate report is being printed (to Print
Preview).
4. To return to the company desktop, close the print preview. (This

also closes the exchange rates spreadsheet.)
The updated rates are now ready for use by Sage Accpac
applications.
5. To check that the most recent rates have been imported

successfully, open the Currency Rates dialog box and use the
Finder to choose a rate table.
The updated rates appear in the grid.

6. Close Excel if you are not using it for other tasks.
Example 4 This macro adds a Finder to GL accounts to place the GL account

description in the currency code description, validate the currency
code description, reject xxx and put in a default value for the
description when you click New. Note that this macro needs a
reference to the Sage Accpac Finder 1.0 library.
Private WithEvents dscurr As
AccpacCS3100.ACCPACDSControl
Private Sub AccpacCS3100UICtrl1_OnUIAppClosed()

Set dscurr = Nothing
Unload Me
End Sub
Private Sub AccpacCS3100UICtrl1_OnUIAppOpened()

Set dscurr =
AccpacCS3100UICtrl1.UIDSControls("dsCSCCD")
End Sub
Private Sub CommandButton1_Click()

Dim glFinder As AccpacFinder.ViewFinder
Set glFinder = New AccpacFinder.ViewFinder
glFinder.ViewID = "GL0001"
glFinder.Session = AccpacCS3100UICtrl1.UISession
glFinder.ReturnFieldIDs = Array(3)
If glFinder.Finder = False Then

Exit Sub
End If
AccpacCS3100UICtrl1.UIAppControls("fecCSCCD_Curname").Va
lue = glFinder.ReturnFieldValues
End Sub
Private Sub dscurr_OnRecordChanged(ByVal eReason As
tagEventReason, ByVal pField As
AccpacDataSrc.IAccpacDSField, ByVal pMultipleFields As
AccpacDataSrc.IAccpacDSFields)
If eReason = RSN_INIT Then
AccpacCS3100UICtrl1.UIAppControls("fecCSCCD_Curname").Va
lue = "New Default Value"
End If
End Sub
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1413

The Sage Accpac Objects
Private Sub dscurr_OnRecordChanging(ByVal eReason As

tagEventReason, pStatus As tagEventStatus, ByVal pField
As AccpacDataSrc.IAccpacDSField, ByVal pMultipleFields
As AccpacDataSrc.IAccpacDSFields)
If eReason = RSN_FIELDCHANGE Then
If pField.Name = "CURNAME" Then
If pField.UncommittedValue = "xxx" Then
MsgBox "xxx is not allowed here", ,
"Error"
AccpacCS3100UICtrl1.UIAppControls("fecCSCCD_Curname").Se
tFocus
pStatus = STATUS_CANCEL
End If
End If
End If
End Sub
The Sage Accpac Objects

The rest of this chapter describes each Sage Accpac object, in
alphabetical order. The object may be a singular object or a collection
of objects. Collections are named in the plural form; for example,
AccpacViewKeys (as opposed to the singular object, AccpacViewKey).
How to read The following points explain how this chapter organizes each object
object descriptions
description:
Each object description is divided into two sections: methods (if

any) and properties (if any).
Each object description outlines the path that your program

must take to access the object.
Each method description is split into these subsections:
Purpose Describes what the method does.

Syntax Takes on the following format:
Object.Property or Method Parameters
where:
Object is an expression in your program that
defines the Sage Accpac object.

AccpacApplication
Parameters (always in italics) are values you set

and send to the object to provide further
information. Optional parameters are in square
brackets. All other parameters must be supplied.
Parameters Description of the parameters.
[in] means that you must pass in a value or a
variable holding a value. The method will use this
value.
[out] means that you must pass in a variable. The
method will put a value into that variable,
replacing any previous value held by the variable.
Such parameters behave like return values.
[in, out] means that you must pass in a variable
with a value. The method uses the variables
passed-in value to perform its actions. Then, the
method may change the variables value (so that
the changed value acts like a return value).
Example Shows how to use the object in Visual Basic.
Return Values Describes the expected return.
Remarks Extra comments, if any.
AccpacApplication
(All properties are read-only) Provides details about an activated
application for a company. This object cannot be created directly by
an application, but must be obtained from an AccpacActiveApp
collection.
Path to the objects methods or properties:
AccpacSession object OpenDBLink (or GetDBLink) method

GetActiveApp method Item method AccpacApplication
object.PropertyName
AccpacApplication Properties
DataLevel. The applications data level. An applications data level
must be incremented whenever a new version of an application
requires that its data be converted. The data level may be the same
for different versions of an application if the version change did not
require data conversion.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1415

AccpacCompany
IsInstalled. Indicates whether the application modules program

files are installed on the machine. When an application is activated
on a company, the applications tables are created on the company
database. Opening a company with a particular application activated
does not mean that the applications program files are actually
installed on the machine. This property indicates whether or not the
program files are present on the machine.
PgmID. The two-letter program ID of the current application (for

example, AS is the program ID for Administrative Services). For
an add-in, the PgmID property returns the program ID of the add-in,
while for the base application, PgmID must be the same as the
Selector property.
PgmVer. Returns the 3 character program version of the current

application. For example the program version 53A includes the
major version number (5), the minor version number (3), and a
revision letter (A).
Selector. The program ID of the base application. For an add-in, the

Selector property returns the program ID of the base application,
while the PgmID property returns the program ID of the add-in. The
program ID is also referred to as the application ID (or app ID). (For
example, AS is the program ID for Administrative Services.)
Sequence. The add-in sequence number. For the base application,

the sequence number must be 00.
AccpacCompany
(All properties are read-only) Provides company profile information for
the company you specified when you opened a session (see the
Open method of the AccpacSession object). This object is obtained
from the GetCompany method of an AccpacDBLink object and
provides information about the company to which the database link
is connected.

AccpacCompany

GetCompany method AccpacCompany object.PropertyName
AccpacCompany Properties
For more details on the following properties, see the section
Creating the Company Profile, in Chapter 5 of the System Manager
Administrator Guide. These properties are set in the Company Profile
UI (in Common Services).
Address1, Address2, Address3, Address4. The first, second, third,

and fourth line of the companys address.
BranchCode. The branch code.
City. The city where the company is located.
Contact. The name of a person to contact for the company.
Country. The name of the country where the company is located.
CountryCode. The country code of the company.
EuroCurrency. Returns whether or not the functional currency is a

Euro currency.
Fax. The companys fax number.
FiscalPeriods. The number of fiscal periods (either 12 or 13) in the

fiscal year.
FourPeriodQuarter. If the number of fiscal periods is 13, then this

property indicates the fiscal quarter (1, 2, 3, or 4) that contains four
periods (the other three fiscal quarters each contains three periods).
HandleInactiveGLAccounts. Indicates how to handle inactive GL

accounts.
HandleLockedFscPeriods. Indicates how to handle locked fiscal

periods.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1417

AccpacCompany
HandleNonexistantGLAccounts. Indicates how to handle non-

existent GL accounts.
HomeCurrency. The companys functional currency code.
LocationCode. The companys location code.
LocationType. The companys location type.
Multicurrency. Returns whether or not the company is set up to use

multicurrency.
Name. The name of the company.
OrgID. The organization ID of the company as set up in Database

Setup. (Note that the OrgID is not set in the Company Profile.)
Phone. The companys phone number.
PhoneFormat. Indicates whether the phone and fax numbers are

formatted. Returns TRUE if numbers are formatted; otherwise
FALSE.
PostCode. The companys postal code or zip code.
RateType. The default rate type for the company.
Reporting Currency. The currency code of the currency to use in the

companys reports. If the EuroCurrency property is FALSE,
ReportingCurrency is not used. If the EuroCurrency property is
TRUE, ReportingCurrency defines the currency in which fiscal
results are to be reported. This may be the Euro (EUR) or one of the
Euros block member currencies.
SessionWarnDays. The number of days that a date can deviate from

the session date without generating a warning message.
State. The province or state where the company is located.

AccpacCurrency
AccpacCurrency
(All properties are read-only) Provides currency information for the
currency code that you pass to the GetCurrency method of the
AccpacSession object. For example, if you pass USD to the
GetCurrency method, the properties and methods of the
AccpacCurrency object (listed below) are for the USD currency
code.
AccpacSession object GetCurrency method AccpacCurrency

object.PropertyName/MethodName
AccpacCurrency Methods
IsBlockCombinationWith
Purpose Returns whether the current AccpacCurrency objects currency
belongs to the same currency block as the specified currency code,
on or before the specified date.
Syntax Function IsBlockCombinationWith(

CurCode As String,
Date As Date,
BlockDateMatch As tagBlockDateMatchEnum) As Boolean
Parameters CurCode: [in] currency code

Date: [in] date
BlockDateMatch: [in] how date matching should be done
Return Value Returns whether or not the current AccpacCurrency objects

currency belongs to the same currency block as CurCode, on or
before Date.
IsBlockMaster
Purpose Returns whether the current AccpacCurrency objects currency is a
block master currency on or before the given date.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1419

AccpacCurrency
Syntax Function IsBlockMaster(

Date As Date,
BlockDateMatch As tagBlockDateMatchEnum) As Boolean
Parameters Date: [in] date

Return Value Returns whether or not the current AccpacCurrency objects

currency is a block master currency on or before Date.
IsBlockMember
Purpose Returns whether or not the currency is a member of a block currency

on or before the given date. If its TRUE, the currency rate
information with the block master is also returned.
Syntax Function IsBlockMember(

Date As Date,
BlockDateMatch As tagBlockDateMatchEnum,
[CurrencyRate As AccpacCurrencyRate]) As Boolean
Parameters Date: [in] date

CurrencyRate: [out, optional] currency rate information with block
master
Return Value Returns whether or not the currency is a member of a block currency
on or before Date.
AccpacCurrrency Properties
For more details on the following properties, see Maintaining
Currency Codes in Chapter 8 of this manual.
Decimals. The number of decimal places (0, 1, 2, or 3) to use for the

currency.
DecimalSep. The decimal group separator. The separator can be

., ,, or (blank).

AccpacCurrencyRate
Description. The name of the currency (the description associated

with the currency code).
NegativeDisplay. Defines how negative amounts will be displayed:
Value Description Constant

1 Minus sign, after the amount TRAILING_MINUS
2 Minus sign, before the amount LEADING_MINUS
3 Amount enclosed by brackets () BRACKETS
Symbol. The currency code symbol.
SymbolDisplay. The display position for the currency symbol

(before or after the amount, with or without a space between the
symbol and the amount). Returns one of the following values:

1 Before the amount, with a BEFORE_WITH_SPACE
space
2 Before the amount, without a BEFORE_WITHOUT_SPACE
space
3 After the amount, with a space AFTER_WITH_SPACE
4 After the amount, without AFTER_WITHOUT_SPACE
spacing
ThousandsSep. The thousands group separator. The separator can

be ., ,, or (blank).
AccpacCurrencyRate
(All properties are read-only) Provides currency rate information as set
up in the Currency Rates UI (in Common Services). This object is
obtained from the GetCurrencyRate method of an AccpacSession
object.
AccpacSession object GetCurrencyRate method

AccpacCurrencyRate object.PropertyName
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1421

AccpacCurrencyTable
AccpacCurrencyRate Properties
For more details on the following properties, see Entering Currency
Rates, in Chapter 8 of this manual.
DateMatch. Indicates the rate to use (if several rates exist for
different dates), relative to the transaction date. Returns one of the
following values:

1 Match exact date EXACT
2 On or after the specified date LATER
3 On or before the specified date EARLIER
HomeCurrrency. Functional currency code of the exchange rate.
Rate. The exchange rate.
RateDate. The effective date for the exchange rate.
RateOperator. The operator used to apply the rate to the source

currency amount. Returns one of the following values:

1 Multiplies MULTIPLICATION
2 Divides DIVISION
RateType. The currency rate type code used to determine the

exchange rate.
SourceCurrency. The source currency code of the rate.
Spread. The difference that the rate entered can vary from the rate
stored in the currency table, without generating a warning message.
AccpacCurrencyTable
(All properties are read-only) Provides information about how to use
exchange rates for the currency codes stored in the system. The
AccpacCurrencyTable object represents a currency table set up in the

AccpacCurrencyTable
Currency Rates UI (in Common Services). This object is obtained

from the GetCurrencyTable method of an AccpacSession object.
AccpacSession object GetCurrencyTable method

AccpacCurrencyTable object.PropertyName
AccpacCurrencyTable Properties
For more details on the following properties, see Maintaining
Currency Rates and Tables in Chapter 8 of this manual.
DateMatch. Indicates the rate to use (if several rates exist for
different dates), relative to the transaction date (that is, the date
matching method to be used with the currency table). Returns one of
the following values:

1 Match exact date EXACT
2 Match on or after the specified LATER
date
3 Match on or before the specified EARLIER
date
Description. The description of the currency table.
RateOperator. The rate operator used for the currency table.

Returns one of the following RateOperator values:

1 Multiplies MULTIPLICATION
2 Divides DIVISION
SourceOfRates. The source from which the rates are quoted, such as
a newspaper, a website, etc.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1423

AccpacDBLink
AccpacDBLink
(All properties are read-only) Represents a connection (link) to a Sage
Accpac ERP database. A database connection is created through the
OpenDBLink method of an AccpacSession object. Multiple
AccpacDBLink objects created on the same database represent
multiple connections opened to the database.
There are two types of Sage Accpac ERPdatabases:
A company database stores the data of most Common Services

functions and all other applications.
A system database stores the data that is common to multiple

company databases, such as user accounts and authorization
information. A system database can be associated with multiple
company databases.
AccpacDBLink Methods
Close
Purpose Closes the database link.
Syntax Sub Close()
Parameters None
Return Value None
Remarks A closed AccpacDBLink object cannot be reopened. To initiate

another database link, a new AccpacDBLink object must be opened
from an AccpacSession object.
CreateViewTables
Purpose Instructs the specified view to create the tables that it accesses on the
current database link.

AccpacDBLink
Syntax Sub CreateViewTables(ViewID As String)
Parameters ViewID: [in] the Roto ID of the view.
Return Value None
Remarks This method loads the specified view on the current database link
and calls viewCreate() to create the tables that the view needs.
DropViewTables
Purpose Instructs the specified view to drop all the tables that it accesses on
the current database connection.
Syntax Sub DropViewTables(ViewID As String)
Return Value None
Remarks This method loads the specified view and calls viewDrop() to drop
the tables that it accesses.
GetActiveApp
Purpose Returns an AccpacActiveApp object that provides access to details of

all the active applications of the current company database.
Syntax Function GetActiveApp() As AccpacActiveApp
Parameters None
Return Value Returns an AccpacActiveApp object that stores a collection of active

applications for the current database.
GetCompany
Purpose Returns an AccpacCompany object that contains the company

profile settings.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1425

AccpacDBLink
Syntax Function GetCompany() As AccpacCompany
Parameters None
Return Value Returns the AccpacCompany object.
GetFiscalCalendar
Purpose Returns an AccpacFiscalCalendar object that provides access to the
fiscal calendar of the current company.
Syntax Function GetFiscalCalendar() As AccpacFiscalCalendar
Parameters None
Return Value Returns the AccpacFiscalCalendar object of the current company.
GetProcessServerSetup
Purpose Creates and returns an AccpacProcessServerSetup object for the

view identified by the supplied ViewID. If a view has been
configured in the Process Server Administrator to be run via Process
Server, then the view must be opened using OpenViewExt and
passing as the second parameter a configured
AccpacProcessServerSetup object.
Syntax Function GetProcessServerSetup(ViewID As String) As

AccpacProcessServerSetup
Parameters ViewID: [in] target views Roto ID
Return Value Returns the AccpacProcessServerSetup object for the specified view.
Remarks The AccpacProcessServerSetup object is a member of the COM API

library. In the Object Browser, this object is hidden.
OpenView
Purpose Opens a view on the current database link. The view to open is

AccpacDBLink
identified by the supplied ViewID.
Syntax Function OpenView(

ViewID As String,
ppView As AccpacView) As Long

ppView: [out] returns the AccpacView object created.
Return Value Returns a status code of the view open operation. If the view is
opened successfully, the return value is 0.
Remarks If a view has been configured to be run via Process Server,

OpenView will fail and return VC_OPEN_FAILED_PS. In this case,
an application should call GetProcessServerSetup, configure the
returned object, and then call OpenViewExt, passing in the
configured AccpacProcessServerSetup object.
OpenViewExt
Purpose Opens a view on the current database link, using the Process Server
settings specified in the AccpacProcessServerSetup object.
Syntax Function OpenViewExt(

ViewID As String,
pVal As AccpacProcessServerSetup,
ppView As AccpacView) As Long

pVal: [in] an AccpacProcessServerSetup object configured with the
desired settings.
opened successfully, the function returns 0. If the Process Server
does not respond, the function fails with return code
VC_OPEN_FAILED_PSCONNECT.
The AccpacProcessServerSetup object is a member of the COM API

library, and is hidden in the Object Browser.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1427

AccpacDBLink
OpenViewInstance
Purpose Opens a view on the current database link, with the optional
arguments giving enhanced control over the views behavior.
Syntax Function OpenViewInstance(

ViewID As String,
ppView As AccpacView,
[Readonly As Boolean = False],
[Unvalidated As Boolean = False],
[Unrevisioned As Boolean = False],
[Nonheritable As Boolean = False],
[Prefetch As Long],
[RawPut As Boolean = False],
[Noncascading As Boolean = False],
[extra As Variant],
[ProcessServer As AccpacProcessServerSetup]) As Long

Readonly: [in, optional] whether to open the view for read-only
access.
Unvalidated: [in, optional] whether to suppress validations.
Unrevisioned: [in, optional] whether to suppress revisioning.
Nonheritable: [in, optional] whether the composites opened implicitly
by this view will inherit the flags with which this view is opened.
Prefetch: [in, optional] the number of records fetched at a time when
the view instance is read-only.
RawPut: [in, optional] whether to suppress PutEtc behavior on field
puts.
Noncascading: [in, optional] whether to suppress propagation of
foreign key values to composite views.
extra: [in, optional] an unstructured block of data given to the view.
ProcessServer: [in, optional] an AccpacProcessServerSetup object
configured with the desired settings.
successfully opened, the function returns 0.

AccpacDBLink

ParamGet
Purpose Gets the values of the specified field IDs from the first record of the
specified view.
Syntax Function ParamGet(

ViewID As String,
FieldIDs as Variant) As Variant
Parameters ViewID: [in] the Roto ID for the view whose field values (for the first
record) are to be returned.
FieldIDs: [in] an array of field IDs (array of Longs).
Return Value Returns a Variant which is an array of Variants containing the values
of the requested fields in the views first record. The values are
returned in the same order as the requested field IDs as they appear
in the FieldIDs array.
Remarks Unlike the BlkGet method of the DataSource control, this method
will access the views values rather than cached values.
SecCheck
Purpose Performs a security check for the current user on the specified
security resource ID.
Syntax Function SecCheck(rscID As String) As Boolean
Parameters rscID: [in] the security resource ID.
Return Value Returns whether or not the current user has access rights to the
specified security resource.
TransactionBegin
Purpose Begins a database transaction.

Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1429

AccpacDBLink
Syntax Function TransactionBegin(pTransLevel As Long) As Long
Parameters pTransLevel: [out] the transaction level after the transaction begins.
Return Value Returns a status code from the database layer. If the operation was
successful, the function returns 0. If the operation failed, it returns an
error code defined in DBS.H.
TransactionCommit
Purpose Commits the current transaction.
Syntax Function TransactionCommit(pTransLevel As Long) As Long
Parameters pTransLevel: [out] the transaction level after the transaction is

committed.
TransactionGetLevel
Purpose Gets the current transaction level.
Syntax Function TransactionGetLevel(pTransLevel As Long) As Long
Parameters pTransLevel: [out] the current transaction level.
TransactionRollback
Purpose Rolls back the current transaction.
Syntax Function TransactionRollback(pTransLevel As Long) As Long

Parameters pTransLevel: [out] the transaction level after the current transaction
is rolled back.
AccpacDBLink Properties
Flags. The read/write access mode of the database link, set when the
AccpacDBLink object is created by calling the OpenDBLink method
of an AccpacSession object.
Session. The AccpacSession object that created the current

AccpacDBLink object.
Type. The type of database link, (company or system) is set when

the AccpacDBLink object is created by calling the OpenDBLink
method of an AccpacSession object.
Provides access to the fiscal calendar set up in the Fiscal Calendar UI
(in Common Services). This object is obtained from the
GetFiscalCalendar method of an AccpacDBLink object and
represents the fiscal calendar of the company to which the database
link is connected.
AccpacFiscalCalendar Methods
DatesFromPeriod
Purpose Calculates the period start and end dates, given a period number, a
period type, a period length and a base date.
Syntax Function DatesFromPeriod(

Period As Integer,
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1431

PeriodType As tagPeriodType,
PeriodLength As Integer,
BaseDate As Date,
StartDate As Date,
EndDate As Date) As Boolean
Parameters Period: [in] the fiscal period number.

PeriodType: [in] the type of period.
PeriodLength: [in] the period length.
BaseDate: [in] the starting date of the first period.
StartDate: [out] the periods start date
EndDate: [out] the periods end date
Return Value Returns whether or not the start and end dates were successfully
determined.
Remarks Use a combination of period type and length to denote additional

period types.
Examples Bimonthly:
PeriodType = PERTYPE_MONTHLY, PeriodLength = 2
Biweekly (with Sunday = day 1):
PeriodType = PERTYPE_WEEKLY, PeriodLength = 14
DateToPeriod
Purpose Calculates the period number, given a date, a period type, a period
length and a base date.
Syntax Function DateToPeriod(

Date As Date,
PeriodType As tagPeriodType,
PeriodLength As Integer,
BaseDate As Date,
Period As Integer) As Boolean
Parameters Date: [in] the given date.

PeriodType: [in] the type of period.
PeriodLength: [in] the period length.
BaseDate: [in] the starting date of the first period.

Period: [out] the calculated period number.
Return Value Returns whether or not the period number was successfully
determined.
Remarks Use a combination of period type and length to denote additional

period types.
Examples Bimonthly:
PeriodType = PERTYPE_MONTHLY, PeriodLength = 2
Biweekly (with Sunday = day 1):
PeriodType = PERTYPE_WEEKLY, PeriodLength = 14
GetFirstYear
Purpose Retrieves information on the first fiscal year set up in the companys
fiscal calendar.
Syntax Function GetFirstYear(

[Year As String],
[FiscalPeriods As Integer],
[Qtr4Period As Integer],
[Active As Boolean]) As Boolean
Parameters Year: [out, optional] the fiscal year.

FiscalPeriods: [out, optional] the number of fiscal periods.
Qtr4Period: [out, optional] the quarter with 4 periods, if the number
of fiscal periods is 13.
Active: [out, optional] whether the fiscal year is set as active.
Return Value Returns whether or not the first fiscal year is found in the fiscal
calendar.
GetLastYear
Purpose Retrieves information of the last fiscal year set up in the companys
fiscal calendar.
Syntax Function GetLastYear(

[Year As String],
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1433

Parameters Year: [out, optional] the fiscal year.

FiscalPeriods: [out, optional] the number of fiscal periods.
Qtr4Period: [out, optional] the quarter with 4 periods, if the number
of fiscal periods is 13.
Active: [out, optional] whether the fiscal year is set as active.
Return Value Returns whether or not the last fiscal year is found in the fiscal
calendar.
GetPeriod
Purpose Retrieves the fiscal year and period to which the given date belongs.
Returns whether the given date is a valid date defined in the fiscal
calendar.
Syntax Function GetPeriod(

Date As Date,
[Period As Integer],
[Year As String],
[PeriodOpen As Boolean]) As Boolean
Parameters Date: [in] the date.

Period: [out, optional] the fiscal period.
Year: [out, optional] the fiscal year.
PeriodOpen: [out, optional] whether the fiscal period is open.
Return Value Returns whether or not the specified date falls in a fiscal period
defined in the fiscal calendar.
GetPeriodDates
Purpose Retrieves the start and end dates of the given fiscal year and period.
Returns whether the given fiscal year and period are defined in the
companys fiscal calendar.

Syntax Function GetPeriodDates(

Year As String,
Period As Integer,
[StartDate As Date],
[EndDate As Date],
[PeriodOpen As Boolean]) As Boolean
Parameters Year: [in] the fiscal year.

Period: [in] the fiscal period.
StartDate: [out, optional] the period start date.
EndDate: [out, optional] the period end date.
PeriodOpen: [out, optional] whether the period is open.
Return Value Returns whether or not the specified fiscal year and period are
GetQuarter
Purpose Retrieves the fiscal quarter that the given fiscal period belongs to in
the given fiscal year.
Syntax Function GetQuarter(

Year As String,
Period As Integer,
Quarter As Integer) As Boolean

Period: [in] the fiscal period.
Quarter: [out] the quarter where the fiscal period falls.
Return Value Returns whether or not the specified fiscal year and period are
GetQuarterDates
Purpose Retrieves the start and end dates of the specified quarter in the given
fiscal year.
Syntax Function GetQuarterDates(

Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1435

Year As String,
Quarter As Integer,
[EndDate As Date]) As Boolean

Quarter: [in] the fiscal quarter.
StartDate: [out, optional] the quarters start date.
EndDate: [out, optional] the quarters end date.
Return Value Returns whether or not the specified fiscal year and quarter are
GetYear
Purpose Retrieves information about the given fiscal year.
Syntax Function GetYear(

Year As String,

FiscalPeriods: [out, optional] the number of fiscal periods in the fiscal
year.
Qtr4Period: [out, optional] the quarter that contains 4 fiscal periods,
if FiscalPeriods is 13.
Active: [out, optional] whether the fiscal year is active.
Return Value Returns whether or not the specified fiscal year is defined in the
fiscal calendar.
GetYearDates
Purpose Retrieves the start and end dates of the given fiscal year.
Syntax Function GetYearDates(

Year As String,

AccpacMultiuser
[EndDate As Date]) As Boolean

StartDate: [out, optional] the fiscal years start date.
EndDate: [out, optional] the fiscal years end date.
Return Value Returns whether or not the specified fiscal year is defined in the
fiscal calendar.
AccpacMultiuser
Provides facilities to control multi-user access to Sage Accpac. This
object is obtained from the GetMultiuser method of an
AccpacSession object.
Avoid using the AccpacMultiuser object if possible. Locking should

be done by views rather than by UIs or macros. Locking is especially
dangerous when Sage Accpac is running remotely over the internet.
LockApp
Purpose Locks an applications data shared or exclusive.
Syntax Function LockApp(

OrgID As String,
AppID As String,
Exclusive As Boolean) As tagMultiuserStatus
Parameters OrgID: [in] the organization (database) ID of the company.

AppID: [in] the two-letter application ID of the application whose
data is to be locked.
Exclusive: [in] whether to lock the applications data exclusive
(TRUE) or shared (FALSE).
Return Value Returns the status of the call.
Remarks If possible, avoid using this method. Locking should be done by

views rather than by UIs or macros. Locking (by a UI or macro) is
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1437

AccpacMultiuser
especially dangerous when Sage Accpac ERP is running remotely

over the Internet. When a view opens, it automatically locks the
applications data shared if required, so theres no need to explicitly
lock the applications data (shared).
Call LockApp only when the applications data isnt currently locked
by a previous call to LockApp. To upgrade (from shared to
exclusive) or downgrade (from exclusive to shared) a programs
existing lock on the applications data, use RegradeApp. To unlock
the applications data, use UnlockApp.
LockOrg
Purpose Locks an organizations database shared or exclusive.
Syntax Function LockOrg(

OrgID As String,
Parameters OrgID: [in] the organization ID of the database to be locked.

Exclusive: [in] whether to lock the organizations database exclusive
(TRUE) or shared (FALSE).

over the Internet. When a view opens, it automatically locks the
organizations database shared if required, so theres no need to
explicitly lock the organizations database (shared).
Call LockOrg only when the organizations database isnt currently

locked by a previous call to LockOrg. To upgrade (from shared to
exclusive) or downgrade (from exclusive to shared) a programs
existing lock on the organizations database, use RegradeOrg. To
unlock the organizations database, use UnlockOrg.

AccpacMultiuser
LockRsc
Purpose Locks a resource shared or exclusive.
Syntax Function LockRsc(

Resource As String,
Parameters Resource: [in] the name of the resource to lock.

Exclusive: [in] whether to lock the resource exclusive (TRUE) or
shared (FALSE).

over the Internet.
Unlike LockApp and LockOrg, to upgrade (from shared to exclusive)

or downgrade (from exclusive to shared) an existing lock on the
resource, call LockRsc with the appropriate value for Exclusive
(TRUE to upgrade, FALSE to downgrade). You do not have to call
UnlockRsc first.
To unlock the resource, use UnlockRsc.
RegradeApp
Purpose Upgrades (from shared to exclusive) or downgrades (from exclusive

to shared) a lock on an applications data.
Syntax Function RegradeApp(

OrgID As String,
AppID As String,
Upgrade As Boolean) As tagMultiuserStatus

lock is being upgraded or downgraded.
Upgrade: [in] whether the programs lock on the applications data
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1439

AccpacMultiuser
should be upgraded (TRUE) or downgraded (FALSE).
Remarks If possible, avoid using this method. Lock manipulation should be

done by views rather than by UIs or macros. Lock manipulation (by
a UI or macro) is especially dangerous when Sage Accpac ERP is
running remotely over the Internet.
Before calling RegradeApp, the program must have already locked

the applications data by calling LockApp. Calls to RegradeApp may
be nested. If a program initially has shared access to the applications
data, nested calls to RegradeApp to upgrade and then restore the
programs lock on the applications data will result in the data being
locked exclusively until the outermost level of nested calls restores
the lock, returning it to shared access.
RegradeOrg
Purpose Upgrades (from shared to exclusive) or downgrades (from exclusive

to shared) a lock on an organizations database.
Syntax Function RegradeOrg( OrgID As String,

Upgrade As Boolean) As tagMultiuserStatus
Parameters OrgID: [in] the organization ID of the database whose lock is being
upgraded or downgraded.
Upgrade: [in] whether the programs lock on the organizations
database should be upgraded (TRUE) or downgraded (FALSE).
Remarks If possible, avoid using this method. Lock manipulation should be

done by views rather than by UIs or macros. Lock manipulation (by
a UI or macro) is especially dangerous when Sage Accpac ERP is
running remotely over the Internet.
Before calling RegradeOrg, the program must have already locked

the organizations database by calling LockOrg. Calls to RegradeOrg
may be nested.

AccpacMultiuser
If a program initially has shared access to the organizations

database, nested calls to RegradeOrg to upgrade and then restore the
programs lock on the organizations database results in the database
being locked until the outermost level of nested calls restores the
lock, returning it to shared access.
Test
Purpose Tests if the specified resource is locked, and if its locked, indicates
whether the lock is exclusive or shared. If the resource is locked,
Exclusive indicates whether the existing lock is exclusive or shared.
Syntax Function Test(

Resource As String,
Exclusive As Boolean) As Boolean
Parameters Resource: [in] the name of the resource.

Exclusive: [out] whether the existing lock is exclusive (TRUE) or
shared (FALSE), if the resource is locked.
Return Value Returns whether or not the resource is locked.

over the Internet.
UnlockApp
Purpose Unlocks an applications data that was locked by a previous call to

LockApp.
Syntax Function UnlockApp(

OrgID As String,
AppID As String) As tagMultiuserStatus

data is to be unlocked.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1441

AccpacMultiuser
Remarks If possible, avoid using this method. However, if the applications

data is currently locked by the UI or macro (through an earlier
LockApp call), use this method to unlock the data.
UnlockOrg
Purpose Unlocks an organizations database that was locked by a previous
call to LockOrg.
Syntax Function UnlockOrg(OrgID As String) As tagMultiuserStatus.
Parameters OrgID: [in] the organization ID of the database to unlock.
Remarks If possible, avoid using this method. However, if the organizations

database is currently locked by the UI or macro (through an earlier
LockOrg call), use this method to unlock the database.
UnlockRsc
Purpose Unlocks a resource that was locked by a previous call to LockRsc.
Syntax Function UnlockRsc(Resource As String) As tagMultiuserStatus.
Parameters Resource: [in] the name of the resource to unlock.
Remarks If possible, avoid using this method. However, if the resource is

currently locked by the UI or macro (through an earlier LockRsc
call), use this method to unlock the resource.

AccpacOrganization
AccpacOrganization
(All properties are read-only) Provides details of a Sage Accpac ERP
database set up in Database Setup. This object is obtained from an
AccpacOrganizations collection.
AccpacOrganization Methods
GetOrgInfo
Purpose Retrieves all the properties of the AccpacOrganization object in a

single method call.
Syntax Sub GetOrgInfo(

DatabaseID As String,
Name As String,
SystemDatabaseID As String,
Type As tagOrganizationTypeEnum,
SecEnabled As Boolean)
Parameters DatabaseID: [out] the database ID.

Name: [out] the database name.
SystemDatabaseID: [out] the database ID of associated database.
Type: [out] the database type.
SecEnabled: [out] whether security is enabled for the database.
Return Value None
AccpacOrganization Properties
DatabaseID. The database ID of the current organization.
Name. The descriptive name of the database (organization).
SystemDatabaseID. The database ID of the system database that the

current organization belongs to, if it is a company database. If the
organization itself is a system database, this property returns .
Type. The type of the database.

Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1443

AccpacPrintSetup
AccpacPrintSetup
Provides printer setup information when Sage Accpac ERP is run
from the local machine. This object is obtained from the
GetPrintSetup method of an AccpacSession object.
Many of the AccpacPrintSetup objects (print setting) properties have

corresponding properties in the AccpacReport object. Set the print
setting-related properties directly in the AccpacReport object (rather
than in the AccpacPrintSetup object) if you want the particular
report to override the users default print settings. For
documentation on the AccpacPrintSetup objects properties, use the
Object Browser in VB.
AccpacPrintSetup Methods
Query
Purpose Shows the local printer setup dialog.
Syntax Function Query(hWnd As Long) As Boolean
Parameters hWnd: [in] the window handle of the caller.
Return Value Returns whether or not any printer setup information has changed.
Remarks If Query returns TRUE, the Save method should be called to save the
changes (for the current user).
The AccpacPrintSetup object should only be accessed when the

associated AccpacSession objects IsRemote property is FALSE (that
is, when Sage Accpac ERP is running locally).
Save
Purpose Saves the local printer setup information for the current user.
Syntax Sub Save()
Parameters None

AccpacProperty
Return Value None
Remarks The Save method is usually called after Query (which shows the
printer setup dialog) returns TRUE, indicating that printer setup
information has changed.
The AccpacPrintSetup object should only be accessed when the

associated AccpacSession objects IsRemote property is FALSE (that
is, when Sage Accpac ERP is running locally).
AccpacProperty
Provides access to application properties stored in System Manager.
With an AccpacProperty object, UIs, macros, and other components
can store runtime properties in System Manager. These properties
are available in later sessions and are machine-independent.
Sage Accpac ERP properties are stored on a per-user basis and each
property is identified by the combination of:
Program (Object) ID the Roto ID of the UI.
Menu ID the menu ID.
Keyword the application-defined keyword of the property.
Property values can be stored as strings or as arrays of binary values.

An AccpacProperty object is obtained from the GetAccpacProperty
method of an AccpacSession object.
PropClear
Purpose Clears the property from the property file.
Syntax Function PropClear() As Long
Parameters None
Return Value Returns 0 upon success and a non-zero error code upon failure.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1445

AccpacProperty
Remarks The property whose value is being cleared is specified by this

AccpacProperty objects keyword, menuID, and objectID.
PropGet
Purpose Retrieves the property value based on the values set in this
AccpacProperty objects keyword, menuID and objectID. The
property value can be retrieved as a String or as an array of Bytes.
Syntax Function PropGet(

varBuf as Variant,
[PropType As tagPropertyType]) As Long
Parameters varBuf: [out] the property value.

PropType: [in, optional] the property values type.
Remarks If PropType is set to PROP_AS_STRING, the property is returned as a

String. If PROP_AS_ARRAY is specified, the property is returned as
an array of Bytes. If PropType isnt specified, the property is returned
as a String.
PropGetEx
Purpose Retrieves the Sage Accpac ERP property corresponding to the
specified objectID, menuID and keyword (as opposed to the
AccpacProperty objects own objectID, menuID, and keyword). The
property value can be retrieved as a String or as an array of Bytes.
Syntax Function PropGetEx(

objectID As String,
menuID As String,
keyword As String,
Buffer As Variant,
PropType As tagPropertyType) As Long

AccpacProperty
Parameters objectID: [in] the object (program) ID of the property.

menuID: [in] the menu ID of the property.
keyword: [in] the keyword of the property.
Buffer: [out] the property value.
PropType: [in] the property values type.
Remarks If PropType is set to PROP_AS_STRING, the property is returned as a

String. If PROP_AS_ARRAY is specified, the property is returned as
an array of Bytes. Unlike the PropGet method, you must specify
PropType for PropGetEx.
PropPut
Purpose Saves the property value to the property file.
Syntax Function PropPut(

varBuf As Variant,
lSize As Long) As Long
Parameters varBuf: [in] the property value.

lSize: [in] the size of property value passed in through varBuf.
Remarks The property value passed into this function must be a String or an
array of Bytes. The size of the property value is the length of the
string or the number of elements in the array of Bytes.
The property whose value is being saved is specified by this

AccpacProperty objects keyword, menuID, and objectID.
AccpacProperty Properties
AppID. The application ID of the property.
AppVersion. The application version of the property.
keyword. The keyword of the property.

Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1447

AccpacReport
menuID. The menu ID of the property.
objectID. The object (program) ID of the property. For a UI, the

object ID is the UIs Roto ID.
AccpacReport
Provides methods to generate a Sage Accpac ERP report.
The AccpacReport object is obtained from the ReportSelect method

of an AccpacSession object. The following Visual Basic code
illustrates how to use the methods and properties of the
AccpacReport object.
Example Dim Session As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacSession

Set Session = CreateObject("ACCPAC.AccpacSession")
Session.Open "ADMIN", "ADMIN", "SAMLTD", Date, 0, ""
Dim rpt As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacReport

Set rpt = Session.ReportSelect("CSCURRATES", " ", "
")
rpt.SetParam "FROMCUR", " "

rpt.SetParam "TOCUR", "ZZZ"
rpt.SetParam "FROMTYPE", " "
rpt.SetParam "TOTYPE", "ZZ"
rpt.SetParam "FROMDATE", Format(Date, "yyyymmdd")
rpt.SetParam "TODATE", Format(Date, "yyyymmdd")
rpt.PrintDestination = PD_PREVIEW
rpt.PrintReport
AccpacReport Methods
CompleteProcessServerSettings
Purpose Takes the AccpacProcessServerSetup object for the report and uses it
to complete the report configuration. Call this after the
AccpacProcessServerSetup object has been configured and before
printing.

AccpacReport
Syntax Function CompleteProcessServerSettings() As Long
Parameters None
Remarks If a report is configured to be run through the Process Server, the

following must be done:
1. Create the report object by calling the ReportSelect method of an

2. Check the RequiresProcessServerSettings property.
3. If TRUE, call GetProcessServerSetup to get an

4. Configure the AccpacProcessServerSetup object.
5. Call CompleteProcessServerSettings to save the

AccpacProcessServerSetup settings to the report object.
6. Call Confirm as usual.

Confirm
Purpose Sets up the print settings for the report and loads the saved print
settings, if any, for the current report. Optionally, based on the
ShowDialog parameter, a print settings/confirmation dialog is
displayed. This dialog allows the user to change print settings.
Syntax Function Confirm(

ShowDialog As Boolean,
hWnd As Long) As Boolean
Parameters ShowDialog: [in] whether to show print setup/confirmation dialog.

hWnd: [in] the window handle of the caller.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1449

AccpacReport
Return Value Returns whether or not the user chose to proceed with printing the
report.
Remarks If the current session is a remote connection to a Sage Accpac ERP

server, the print destination is always set to PD_PREVIEW and no
print settings/confirmation dialog is displayed.
GetProcessServerSetup
Purpose Returns an AccpacProcessServerSetup object for the report.
Syntax Function GetProcessServerSetup() As AccpacProcessServerSetup
Parameters None
Return Value Returns the AccpacProcessServerSetup object for the report.
Remarks If a report is configured to be run through the Process Server, the

following must be done:
1. Create the report object by calling the ReportSelect method of an

2. Check the RequiresProcessServerSetup property.
3. If TRUE, call GetProcessServerSetup to get an

4. Configure the AccpacProcessServerSetup object.
5. Call CompleteProcessServerSettings to save the

AccpacProcessServerSetup settings to the report object.
6. Call Confirm as usual.

PrinterSetup
Purpose Configures the print settings for the report according to the settings
in the supplied AccpacPrintSetup object.

AccpacReport
Syntax Sub PrinterSetup(pSetup As AccpacPrintSetup)
Parameters pSetup: [in] an AccpacPrintSetup object that contains the print

settings.
Return Value None
Remarks In most cases, a report can make use of the current users default
print settings, or change some common print settings by setting its
properties (that is, Destination, NumOfCopies).
PrinterSetup is only called if the report needs some specific print

settings to be set, such as the printers device name or the reports
orientation.
PrintReport
Purpose Prints a report to the printer, to a file, to email, or to the preview

screen, depending on the value of the Destination property.
Syntax Function PrintReport() As Boolean
Parameters None
Return Value The function returns whether or not a Web Report is generated. If
the return value is TRUE, a Web Report is generated and
applications should obtain the URL of the generated report through
the WebReportURL property and display the report accordingly. If
the return value is FALSE, the session is in-process to the caller, and
the report has been printed to the specified destination.
Remarks For reports that include parameters, make sure that SetParam calls
have been made before calling PrintReport.
ReInit
Purpose Re-initializes the AccpacReport object so that it may be used to print

a new report.
Syntax Sub ReInit()

Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1451

AccpacReport
Remarks Use this method to use the same report object to print multiple
instances of a report, each with different report parameters.
SaveWebReportToLocal
Purpose Downloads a web report to a local file. The report is generated as

the specified report output type.
Syntax Function SaveWebReportToLocal(ReportType As

tagReportOutputType) As String
Parameters ReportType: [in] the report output type.
Return Value Returns the path to the local file (including the filename).
SetParam
Purpose Sets a value to the specified report parameter name.
Syntax Function SetParam(

ParamName As String,
ParamValue As String) As Boolean
Parameters ParamName: [in] the report parameter name.

ParamValue: [in] the report parameters value.
Return Value Returns whether or not the operation succeeded.
Remarks SetParam calls should be made before PrintReport is called.
AccpacReport Properties
Collate. Whether or not to collate the report..
Destination. The print destination of the report. Can be one of the

following values:

1 Printer PD_PRINTER
2 File PD_FILE
3 HTML file PD_HTML

AccpacReport

4 Outputs to printer and prints PD_PRINTCONF
only the first page
5 Outputs to Preview PD_PREVIEW
6 E-mail PD_EMAIL
7 Outputs to Crystal Info PD_SCHEDULE
8 Outputs to Messenger Fax PD_MSGFAX
Format. Returns/sets the output format of the report. This property

is only valid for an e-mail output destination. It is ignored for all
other destinations.
Name. (Read-only) The name of the report. The reports name is set
when the report is created by calling the ReportSelect method of an
NumOfCopies. The number of copies to print, if the destination is a

printer.
OutputDestination. Where the report is generated, if the client is

connected to a remote Sage Accpac ERP server. Can be one of the
following values:

1 Server OD_SERVER
2 Client OD_CLIENT
PrintDir. The print directory, if the destination is a file.
RequiresProcessServerSettings. (Read-only) Whether the report must

be configured for the Process Server before printing it.
UseProcessServer. (Read-only) Whether the user selected to use the

Process Server to run the report.
WebReportURL. (Read-only) The URL of the generated report, after

PrintReport returns TRUE (indicating that a Web report has been
generated). A Web report is generated if the current client is
connected to a remote Sage Accpac ERP server. The generated report
can be shown by calling the ReportViewer method of an
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1453

AccpacSession
AccpacPrintReport object (in the Sage Accpac Report Viewer

library).
AccpacSession
Enables you to open or close a session, and to establish database
connections. The AccpacSession object also provides information
about currency, applications, and errors that occurred during the
session.
All other objects in COM API (that is, the Sage Accpac Object Model)
are created either directly or indirectly by the AccpacSession object.
This object is the root object that is, you must create and open the
AccpacSession object before you can access any of the other Sage
Accpac objects. The following Visual Basic code illustrates how to
create and open the AccpacSession object:
Set Session = CreateObject(ACCPAC.Session)
Session.Open "ADMIN", "ADMIN", "SAMLTD", Date, 0, ""
AccpacSession Methods
CheckHomeCurrency
Purpose Checks if the home currency defined in the company profile of the
logged in company exists in the companys currency codes table.
Syntax Function CheckHomeCurrency() As Boolean
Parameters None
Return Value Returns whether or not the home currency defined for the company
exists in the currency codes table.
The home currency is also referred to as the functional currency.

AccpacSession
CheckReminders
Purpose Checks if there are active reminders for the currently logged in user.
Syntax Function CheckReminders() As Boolean
Parameters None
Return Value Returns whether or not where are active reminders for the current
user.
CheckRestartRecs
Purpose Checks if restart records exist in the logged in company.
Syntax Sub CheckRestartRecs(

RestartRecsExist As Boolean,
IsAdmin As Boolean)
Parameters RestartRecsExist: [out] whether restart records exist.

IsAdmin: [out] if RestartRecsExist is TRUE, this parameter indicates
whether the current user is ADMIN.
Return Value None
CheckSessionDate
Purpose Checks if the session date is a valid date defined in the companys
fiscal calendar, and whether the fiscal period in which the session
date belongs is active.
Syntax Sub CheckSessionDate(

DateInFiscal As Boolean,
PeriodActive As Boolean)
Parameters DateInFiscal: [out] whether the session date is a date defined in the
fiscal calendar.
PeriodActive: [out] if DateInFiscal is TRUE, this parameter indicates
whether the fiscal period that the session date belongs to is active.
Return Value None

Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1455

AccpacSession
CheckSessionDate2
Purpose Checks if the session date is a valid date defined in the companys
fiscal calendar, whether the fiscal period in which the session date
belongs is active and open (not locked), and whether a warning
should be displayed if the period is locked.
Syntax Sub CheckSessionDate2(

DateInFiscal As Boolean,
PeriodActive As Boolean,
PeriodOpen As Boolean,
WarnPeriodLocked As Boolean)
Parameters DateInFiscal: [out] whether the session date is a date defined in the
fiscal calendar.
PeriodActive: [out] if DateInFiscal is TRUE, this parameter indicates
whether the fiscal period that the session date belongs to is active.
PeriodOpen: [out] if DateInFiscal is TRUE, this parameter indicates
whether the fiscal period that the session date belongs to is open (not
locked).
WarnPeriodLocked: [out] if DateInFiscal is TRUE, this parameter
indicates whether a warning should be displayed if the fiscal period
that the session date belongs to is locked (that is, if PeriodOpen is
FALSE).
Return Value None
Clone
Purpose Clones the current AccpacSession object. The new object has the
same authentication information as the current session object, but is
attached to a different company database ID.
Syntax Function Clone(CompanyID As String) As AccpacSession
Parameters CompanyID [in] the database ID of the company to which the new
session should be attached
Return Value Returns the cloned AccpacSession object.

AccpacSession
Close
Purpose Closes the session and releases all resources allocated to the session.
(This is done automatically to the implicitly created session when the
macro completes. However, you should close and destroy any
AccpacSession objects that you create explicitly.)
Syntax Sub Close()
Parameters None
Return Value None
Remarks When a session is closed, the user is signed off from the company,
and all connections to the company database are closed. All objects
that are created from this AccpacSession object become invalid and
should not accessed again.
The session closes automatically when the AccpacSession object is

destroyed.
CreateObjectHandle
Purpose Creates a new object handle to be used to launch another

application. This method is also used to obtain the CLSID and
codebase of the application to be launched. When an application is
launched using the newly created object handle, it inherits the
session information from the current session.
Syntax Sub CreateObjectHandle(

ObjectID As String,
ObjectKey As String,
ObjectHandle As String,
CLSID As String,
Codebase As String)
Parameters ObjectID: [in] the Roto ID of the application object to be launched.

ObjectKey: [in] a key to be passed to the launched object. The key is a
String of any format as long as it is understood by both the current
application and the object in which the key is passed to.
ObjectHandle: [out] the newly assigned object handle.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1457

AccpacSession
CLSID: [out] the COM class ID of the application object.

Codebase: [out] the codebase of the object (see Remarks for details).
Return Value None
Remarks The application to be launched is specified by its Roto ID. The

system looks up the CLSID and generates the codebase of the
application object based on this Roto ID.
The ObjectKey is a string that would be passed to the launched

application. The most common use of this is to pass the key of the
initial record to display on the launched application. To create the
object key in the correct format, include ACCPACMacroLib.bas
(found in C:\Program Files\Sage Accpac\Macros) in your macro
project, and call its KVBuildList function.
The format of the codebase generated depends on whether or not the

current session is a remote session. If the session is a remote session,
the codebase is the URL of the application objects CAB file. If the
session is not remote, the codebase is the file path to the objects OCX
file.
CreateObjectHandle2
This is the function variation that script languages that do not

support out parameters should be using.
CreateProfile
Purpose Creates a new UI customization profile with the specified profile ID

and description.
Syntax Sub CreateProfile(

ProfileID As String,
ProfileDesc As String)
Parameters ProfileID: [in] the profile ID.

ProfileDesc: [in] the profile description.
Return Value None

AccpacSession
Remarks An administrator (ADMIN) would normally create a new profile

using the UI Profile Maintenance UI in Administrative Services.
(This UI can either be accessed directly or through the Customize
box.)
GetAccpacMeter
Purpose Creates and returns an AccpacMeter object. An AccpacMeter object

provides information about the progress of any lengthy superview
calls in progress for the session and program, such as the percent
completed.
Syntax Sub GetAccpacMeter(pVal As AccpacMeter)
Parameters pVal: [out] returns the AccpacMeter object
Return Value None
Remarks The AccpacMeter object is a member of the COM API library. In the
Object Browser, this object is hidden.
GetAccpacProperty
Purpose Creates and returns an AccpacProperty object. The AccpacProperty

object provides access to Sage Accpac runtime properties that are
stored for the current user.
Syntax Function GetAccpacProperty() As AccpacProperty
Parameters None
Return Value Returns an AccpacProperty object that stores properties for the
current user.
GetAppDependenciesForLanguage
Purpose Returns a list of dependent classes based on the specified application

ID, program name, version, and language code.
Syntax Sub GetAppDependenciesForLanguage(

AppID As String,
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1459

AccpacSession
PgmName As String,
AppVersion As String,
Language As String,
CodebaseType As tagDistFileType,
CLSIDs() As String,
Codebases() As String)
Parameters AppID: [in] the two-letter application ID.

PgmName: [in] the Roto ID of the application.
AppVersion: [in] the application version.
Language: [in] the 3-letter language code.
CodebaseType: [in] the format of the codebases to retrieve.
CLSIDs: [out] an array of COM class IDs for the dependent classes.
Codebases: [out] an array of codebases for the dependent classes.
Return Value None
Remarks The format of the returned items in the Codebases array depends on
the value of CodebaseType:
DF_DYNAMIC - Depends on the clients connection. If the client

is remote, the codebases are the URLs to the dependent classes
CAB files. If the client is in-process, the codebases are the local
paths (including filenames) to the classes (OCX, DLL or EXE)
files.
DF_REMOTE - Codebases are always returned as the URLs to

the dependent classes CAB files.
DF_LOCAL - Codebases are always returned as the local paths

(including filenames) to the dependent classes (OCX, DLL or
EXE) files.
To get the dependent classes based on the current sessions

ProgramName and the current users language, use
GetDependencies instead.
GetCurRateTypeDescription
Purpose Retrieves the description of the specified currency rate type code.

AccpacSession
Syntax Function GetCurRateTypeDescription(

rateTypeCode As String,
rateTypeDescription As String) As Boolean
Parameters rateTypeCode: [in] the rate type code.

rateTypeDescription: [out] the description of the supplied rate type
code.
Return Value Returns whether or not the specified currency rate type code is
found in the Currency Rate Types table.
GetCurRateTypeDescription2

GetCurrency
Purpose Creates and returns an AccpacCurrency object that contains

information about the specified currency code.
Syntax Function GetCurrency(CurrencyCode As String) As AccpacCurrency
Parameters CurrencyCode: [in] the currency code.
Return Value Returns an AccpacCurrency object that represents the specified

currency code.
GetCurrencyRate
Purpose Creates and returns an AccpacCurrrencyRate object that represents

the exchange rate between the specified home and source currency
codes of the specified rate type on a certain date.
Syntax Function GetCurrencyRate(

HomeCurrencyCode As String,
RateType As String,
SourceCurrencyCode As String,
Date As Date) As AccpacCurrencyRate
Parameters HomeCurrencyCode: [in] the home currency code.

Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1461

AccpacSession
RateType: [in] the rate type code.

SourceCurrencyCode: [in] the source currency code.
Date: [in] the date used to search for the exchange rate.
Return Value Returns an AccpacCurrencyRate object that stores details of the

exchange rate. The home currency is also referred to as the
functional currency.
GetCurrencyRateComposite
Purpose Creates and returns an AccpacCurrencyRate object that represents

the composite rate between the specified home and source currency
codes of the specified rate type on a certain date.
Syntax Function GetCurrencyRateComposite(

RateType As String, SourceCurrencyCode As String,


composite exchange rate.
Remarks If both currencies are non-block currencies, this methods returns the
same rate as GetCurrencyRate.
The home currency is also referred to as functional currency.
GetCurrencyRateFloating
Purpose Creates and returns an AccpacCurrencyRate that represents the

floating rate between the specified home and source currency codes
of the specified rate type on a certain date.
Syntax Function GetCurrencyRateFloating(

RateType As String,

AccpacSession
SourceCurrencyCode As String,


floating exchange rate.
Remarks If both currencies are non-block currencies, this methods returns the
same rate as GetCurrencyRate.
The home currency is also referred to as the functional currency.
GetCurrencyTable
Purpose Creates and Returns a currency table as specified by thecurrency

code and rate type.
Syntax Function GetCurrencyTable(

CurCode As String,
RateType As String) As AccpacCurrencyTable
Parameters CurCode: [in] the currency code.

Return Value Returns an AccpacCurrencyTable object that represents the currency

table.
GetDependencies
Purpose Returns a list of dependent classes based on the current sessions

ProgramName and the users language setting (that is, the current
sessions UserLanguage).
Syntax Sub GetDependencies(

CLSIDs() As String,
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1463

AccpacSession
Parameters CodebaseType: [in] the format of the codebases to retrieve.

Return Value None

files.


EXE) files.
To get the dependent classes for a language other than the users
language, use GetDependenciesForLanguage instead.
GetDependenciesForLanguage
Purpose Returns a list of dependent classes based on the current sessions

ProgramName and the specified language code.
Syntax Sub GetDependenciesForLanguage(

Language As String,
CLSIDs() As String,
Parameters Language: [in] the 3-letter language code.

CodebaseType: [in] the format of the codebases to retrieve.

AccpacSession
Return Value None

files.


EXE) files.
To get the dependent classes for the current users language, use
GetDependencies instead.
GetIniFileKey
Purpose Retrieves a value specified in the applications INI file. PrimaryKey is

the name of the section where the value is defined, and SecondaryKey
is the name of the key. If an empty string is passed in as
SecondaryKey, the method checks for the existence of the section and
puts that sections name into KeyData.
Syntax Function GetIniFileKey(

AppID As String,
PrimaryKey As String,
SecondaryKey As String,
KeyData As String) As Boolean

PrimaryKey: [in] the section name.
SecondaryKey: [in] the key name of the value.
KeyData: [out] the key value (or section name, if SecondaryKey is ).
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1465

AccpacSession
Return Value Returns whether or not the specified keys are found in the
application INI file. If SecondaryKey is an empty string, returns
whether or not the section is found.
GetIniFileKey2

GetInstalledReports
Purpose Retrieves a list of reports available from the specified application.
Syntax Function GetInstalledReports(AppID As String) As String()
Parameters AppID: [in] the two-letter application ID
Return Value This method returns an array of Strings. This array contains a list of
reports available from the application.
Remarks The report files available are searched in the following locations:
The applications language-specific directory, depending on the

logged in users language preference.
The customization directory, if defined, for all users for the

current logged in company.
The customization directory, if defined, for all companies for the

current logged in user.
The customization directory, if defined, for all users for all

companies.
GetMultiuser
Purpose Creates and returns an AccpacMultiuser object that provides

facilities to control multi-user access.
Syntax Function GetMultiuser() As AccpacMultiuser
Parameters None

AccpacSession
Return Value Returns an AccpacMultiuser object that provides facilities to control

multi-user access.
Remarks Avoid using the AccpacMultiuser object if possible. Locking should

be done on the view level rather than on the UI or macro level.
Locking is especially dangerous when Sage Accpac ERP is running
remotely over the Internet.
GetObjectCLSID
Purpose Retrieves the COM class ID and codebase of the specified application
object.
Syntax Function GetObjectCLSID(

objectID As String,
DistFileType As tagDistFileType,
CLSID As String,
Codebase As String) As Boolean
Parameters objectID: [in] the Roto ID of the application object.

DistFileType: [in] the format of the codebase to retrieve.
CLSID: [out] the COM class ID of the object.
Codebase: [out] the codebase of the object.
Return Value Returns whether or not the supplied object ID (Roto ID) is valid.
Remarks The format of the codebase returned depends on the value of

DistFileType:
DF_DYNAMIC - Codebase depends on the clients connection. If

the client is remote, the codebase is the URL of the objects CAB
file. If the client is in-process, the codebase is the path to the
OCX file (including filename).
DF_REMOTE - Codebase is always returned as the URL to the

objects CAB file.
DF_LOCAL - Codebase is always returned as the local path to

the applications OCX file (including filename).
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1467

AccpacSession
GetObjectCLSID2

GetObjectKey
Purpose Retrieves the object key associated with the current session.
Syntax Function GetObjectKey() As String
Parameters None
Return Value Returns the object key associated with the object handle that opened
the current session.
Remarks An object key is associated with an object handle when the calling
application calls CreateObjectHandle with the key, and obtains an
object handle. When the object handle is subsequently passed to
another application and used to initialize a session, the key is tied to
the newly opened session and can be obtained from GetObjectKey.
To retrieve parameter values from an object key, include

ACCPACMacroLib.bas (found in C:\Program Files\Sage
Accpac\Macros) in your macro project, and call its KVGetValue
function.
GetPrintSetup
Purpose Creates and returns an AccpacPrintSetup object. If printer settings

have been saved for the specified menuID and ProgramID, the
returned object contains the saved settings. Otherwise, the object
contains default print settings.
Syntax Function GetPrintSetup(

menuID As String,
ProgramID As String) As AccpacPrintSetup
Parameters menuID: [in] the menu ID.

ProgramID: [in] the program ID.
Return Value None

AccpacSession
Remarks After obtaining the AccpacPrintSetup object, you would call its
Query method to show the printer setup dialog, then call its Save
method (if any printer settings have changed).
Only call this method if Sage Accpac ERP is running locally (that is,
IsRemote returns FALSE).
GetProfileCustomizations
Purpose Retrieves UI customization settings for the specified ProfileID and

UIKey. The settings are a list of names of the controls to hide on the
UI.
Syntax Function GetProfileCustomizations(

ProfileID As String,
UIKey As String) As String()
Parameters ProfileID: [in] the profile ID.

UIKey: [in] the unique key (identifier) for the UI.
Return Value Returns an array containing the names of the controls to hide in the
UI for the specified profile.
Remarks This method can only be called if the current user is ADMIN.
GetProfiles
Purpose Retrieves a list of all UI customization profiles set up in Sage Accpac

ERPs Administrative Services.
Syntax Sub GetProfiles(ProfileIDs() As String, ProfileDescs() As String)
Parameters ProfileIDS [out] returns an array of profile IDs; ProfileDescs [out]

returns an array of profile descriptions- one item for each item in the
profile ID array in the same respective position.
Remarks Only users logged in as administrators (ADMIN) can call this

method.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1469

AccpacSession
GetSignonInfo
Purpose Retrieves the signon information of the current session in one call.
Syntax Sub GetSignonInfo(

UserID As String,
CompanyID As String,
CompanyName As String)
Parameters UserID: [out] the ID of the currently logged in user.

CompanyID: [out] the ID of the company associated with the
currently opened session.
CompanyName: [out] the company (database) name of the company
associated with the currently opened session.
Return Value None
GetUserCustomizations
Purpose Retrieves UI customization settings for the current logged in user on

the UI specified by UIKey.
Syntax Function GetUserCustomizations(UIKey As String) As String()
Parameters UIKey: [in] the unique key (identifier) for the UI. This UI must be
part of the application whose AppID is associated with the current
session.
Return Value Returns an array of Strings containing the names of the controls to
hide in the UI for the current logged in user.
GetVersion
Purpose Retrieves the version information of the Sage Accpac System

Manager to which this session is connected.
Syntax Sub GetVersion(

majorVersion As Long,
minorVersion As Long,
Build As Long,
Revision As Long)

AccpacSession
Parameters majorVersion: [out] Sage Accpacs major version number.

minorVersion: [out] Sage Accpacs minor version number.
Build: [out] Sage Accpacs build number.
Revision: [out] Sage Accpacs revision number.
Return Value None
Init
Purpose Initializes the AccpacSession object.
Syntax Sub Init(

ObjectHandle As String,
AppID As String,
ProgramName As String,
AppVersion As String)
Parameters ObjectHandle: [in] the object handle (or , if the object handle is not
available).
AppID: [in] the two-letter application ID of the application object.
ProgramName: [in] the roto ID of the application object.
AppVersion: [in] the application version.
Return Value None
Remarks If a valid object handle is supplied (obtained from a previous call to

CreateObjectHandle or when the application is launched by the Sage
Accpac desktop), the session is initialized and immediately opened.
If an object handle is not available (that is, ObjectHandle is ), the
session is initialized but not opened. The application must then call
Open to open the session.
IsWinUserLoggedOn
Purpose Determines if the specified Windows user is the user that is currently
logged on to the session.
Syntax Sub IsWinUserLoggedOn(

Domain As String,
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1471

AccpacSession
WinUserID As String,
pVal As Boolean)
Parameters Domain: [in] the Windows domain the user is logged on to

WinUserID: [in] the Windows user ID on the supplied domain
pVal: [out] returns TRUE if the current Sage Accpac session user and
the Windows user are the same; otherwise, returns FALSE
IsWinUserLoggedOn
Purpose Determines whether a valid license is installed for an application.
Syntax Function LicenseStatus(

AppID As String,
AppVersion As String)
As tagLicenseStatus
Parameters AppID: [in] the application ID

AppVersion: [in] the application version
Return Value Returns the status of the license for the supplied applcation ID and
version.
Remarks AppVersion can be passed an empty string (""), in which case the
current System Manager version will be assumed.
MacroPause
Purpose Pauses macro recording for the current session.
Syntax Sub macroPause()
Remarks To resume macro recording, call MacroResume.
MacroRecordObject
Purpose Sets up automatic macro recording of the specified view object.
Syntax Sub macroRecordObject( hWnd As Long, objectName As String)

AccpacSession
Parameters hWnd: [in] the programs main window handle

objectName: [in] the name of the object in the initialization file for
this view
Remarks An application must call this method for automatic macro recording
to take place.
All views associated with objectName will be included in macro

recording. This method must be called before views are opened; that
is, before DataSource controls are activated.
Macro recording will not work for remote sessions; that is, when
IsRemote is TRUE.
Macro recording for the application will end when the passed-in
handle (hWnd) is destroyed.
MacroResume
Purpose Purpose: Resumes macro recording for the current session.
Syntax Sub macroResume()
Remarks Call MacroResume after pausing macro recording with a

MacroPause call.
Open
Purpose Opens a session to System Manager with the specified user ID and
password, and with the database ID of the company to connect to
(later on).
Syntax Sub Open(

UserIdentifier As String,
Password As String,
DataBase As String,
SessionDate As Date,
Flags As Long,
Reserved As String)
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1473

AccpacSession
Parameters UserIdentifier: [in] the user ID.

Password: [in] the users password.
DataBase: [in] the database ID (org ID) of the company to open.
SessionDate: [in] the date to be used for the session.
Flags: [in] reserved. Must be 0.
Reserved: [in] reserved. Must be .
Return Value None
Remarks The supplied user ID must be a valid user set up in Sage Accpac
ERP. If the specified company database has security turned on, the
password is validated. Otherwise, the password is ignored.
Although a database ID has to be specified to open a session, no

database connection is established until OpenDBLink is called.
OpenDBLink
Purpose Creates a database connection (link) to a company or system

database, depending on the database link type specified.
Syntax Function OpenDBLink(

LinkType As tagDBLinkTypeEnum,
Flags As tagDBLinkFlagsEnum) As AccpacDBLink
Parameters LinkType: [in] the database link type.

Flags: [in] flags that control read/write access to the database link.
Return Value None
Remarks An AccpacSession object represents a session to a company that is

specified when the session is opened. OpenDBLink creates a
database connection to that company, if the selected link type is a
company database link. If the selected link type is a system database
link, this method creates a database connection to the system
database that is associated with the company of the session.
If OpenDBLink is called multiple times to create multiple

AccpacDBLink objects, multiple database connections are created
and each AccpacDBLink object represents a separate connection.

AccpacSession
OpenWin
Purpose Establishes a Sage Accpac session using Windows authentication.
Syntax Sub OpenWin( Domain As String, UserIdentifier As String,

Password As String, DataBase As String, SessionDate As Date, Flags
As Long, Reserved As String)
Parameters Domain: [in] the name of the Windows domain that the user belongs
to UserIdentifier [in] uses the Windows logon id on the specified
domain as the Sage Accpac user ID Password [in] the password of
the user.
If the specified company database has security enabled, the

password is validated. Otherwise, the password is ignored.
Database: [in] the company Database ID (org ID) to use for this
session.
SessionDate: [in] the date to use for this session.
Flags: [in] reserved - must be 0.
Reserved: [in] reserved - must be "".
Remarks Although a Database ID has to be specified to open a session, no

database connection is established until the application calls
OpenDBLink to create a database link.
The session must be opened before other methods in the object

become available.
RemoteConnect
Purpose Connects the session to a remote Sage Accpac ERP server using the
supplied authentication credentials. This method must be called
before Init.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1475

AccpacSession
Syntax Sub RemoteConnect(

ServerName As String,
UserID As String,
Password As String,
Domain As String)
Parameters ServerName: [in] the name of the Sage Accpac ERP server.
UserID: [in] the username to use to log on to the server.
If enhanced security is configured on the server, the Sage Accpac

ERP remoting architecture uses NT authentication to verify access
rights of the supplied user. The user must be a user recognized on
the server. This parameter is ignored if enhanced security is not
enabled on the server.
Password: [in] the users password.
If enhanced security is enabled on the server, the password is

validated. Otherwise, the password is ignored.
Domain: [in] the Windows domain the supplied user name belongs
to, or the servers machine name if the user is a local user on the
server.
This parameter is ignored if enhanced security is turned off on the

server.
ReportSelect
Purpose Creates and returns an AccpacReport object that represents a report.
Syntax Function ReportSelect(

bstrReportName As String,
menuID As String,
ProgramID As String) As AccpacReport
Parameters bstrReportName: [in] the name of the report. This name must be
defined in the applications report INI file.
menuID: [in] the menu ID.
ProgramID: [in] the program ID.

AccpacSession
Return Value Returns the newly created AccpacReport object, if the specified
report name is a valid report defined in the applications report INI
file.
RscGetString
Purpose Retrieves a string from the applications server-side string resource

file. The caller specifies the application ID. The application version is
determined by the version of the activated application in the current
company (attached to the session).
Syntax Function RscGetString(

AppID As String,
strID As Long) As String

strID: [in] the resource ID of the string in the application resource
file.
Return Value Returns the resource string that matches the specified resource ID.
Returns if there is no string matching the specified resource ID.
SaveProfileCustomizations
Purpose Saves UI customization settings for the specified profile IDs on the
UI specified by UIKey.
Syntax Sub SaveProfileCustomizations(

ProfileIDs() As String,
UIKey As String,
HiddenControls() As String)
Parameters ProfileIDs: [in] an array of Profile ID strings.

UIKey: [in] the unique key (identifier) for the UI. This UI must be
part of the application whose AppID is associated with the current
session.
HiddenControls: [in] an array containing the names of the controls to
hide in the UI for the profiles in ProfileIDs.
Return Value None

Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1477

AccpacSession
Remarks Multiple profile IDs can be specified in the array and the settings are
saved to all of those profiles. HiddenControls is an array of names of
controls to hide on the UI when customization based on any of those
profiles is applied on the UI.
This method can only be called when the current user is ADMIN.
SetLegacyReturnCode
Purpose Sets the return (status) code given to legacy applications.
Syntax Sub SetLegacyReturnCode(ReturnCode As Integer)
Parameters ReturnCode: [in] the return code to pass to the other application.
Return Value None
Remarks This method is mostly used by activation UIs.
TransferFiles
Purpose Transfers files between the server and the client.
Syntax Function TransferFiles(

SourceLocation As tagFileLocation,
SourcePath As String,
DestLocation As tagFileLocation,
DestPath As String) As Long
Parameters SourceLocation: [in] specifies whether the source file is on the client
machine or on the Sage Accpac ERP server.
SourcePath: [in] the path of the source file; the path must be local if
the file is on the client machine; otherwise, the path must be relative
to the company subdirectory on the Sage Accpac ERP server.
DestLocation: [out] returns whether to transfer the source file to the
client machine or to the Sage Accpac ERP server.
DestPath: [out] returns the path of the transferred file; the path must
be local if the file is transferred to the client machine; otherwise, the
path must be relative to the company subdirectory on the Sage
Accpac ERP server.

AccpacSession
Return Value Returns the result code of the operation.
AccpacSession Properties
AppID. (Read-only) The application ID of the session. This is the two-
letter application prefix that identifies the application module, such
as AR, OE, etc.
Application. (Read-only) Returns the current application object as

AccpacSession.
AppVersion. (Read-only) The application version. This is a

three-character string that identifies the application version, such as
53A. The application version is set when the session is initialized
by calling Init.
Codebase. (Read-only) The codebase of the current Sage Accpac

ERP installation. The codebase is the base path to the location where
the Sage Accpac application files are found.
If the session is a remote session, the codebase is the URL to the
location where the application CAB files are downloaded.
If the session is not remote, the codebase is a local file path to the
directory where Sage Accpac ERP is installed.
CompanyID. (Read-only) The ID of the company associated with the

currently opened session. This property is only available after the
session is opened. Otherwise, this property returns .
CompanyName. (Read-only) The database name of the company

associated with the currently opened session.
This property is only available after the session is opened.
Otherwise, this property returns . The company name
returned is the name of the database as set up in Database Setup
(for example, SAMLTD). It is not the name defined in the
Company Profile UI (in Common Services).
DatabaseSeries. (Read-only) The database series of the current Sage

Accpac ERP installation.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1479

AccpacSession
EnforceAppVersion. Whether OpenDBLink calls enforce a match of

(the sessions) AppVersion and the activated application version in
the company database. (By default, this propertys value is TRUE.
Activation UIs set this property to FALSE.)
Errors. (Read-only) The AccpacErrors object that stores the error

messages of the current session.
HelpPath (Read-only) The local path to the Sage Accpac help files
directory. Even though the property itself is read-write, it should be
treated as read-only by UI and macro programmers.
If the session is remote, the path goes to the local directory
where the help files are downloaded and accessed. (This
directory is usually the current users Temp directory.) If the
session isnt remote, this property returns the directory where
the help files are installed.
HelpURL. (Read-only) The path or URL to the Sage Accpac help files
directory.
Unless a UI or macro has a special reason to download a help
file, it should use the HelpPath property (along with the files
name) instead of the HelpURL property to locate its apps help
file. When a UI is started, the (app-wide) help file is downloaded
automatically, so theres no need to look for a remote path.
If the session isnt remote, HelpURL returns a DOS path to the

directory where the help files are installed. Unlike HelpPath, if
the session is remote, HelpURL will return the URL to the
(remote) location where the help files can be downloaded. A UI
or macro may need to use HelpURL if it needs to download a
help file from another app.
IsOpened. (Read-only) Whether or not the current session is opened.

A session is opened by either calling Open with the correct
username (user ID) and password and logging into a valid
company, or by calling Init with a valid object handle assigned
by System Manager.
IsRemote. (Read-only) Whether or not the current session is

accessing a remote or out-of-process Sage Accpac ERP server.

AccpacSession
A session is a remote when the AccpacSession object is created

on a remote machine or out-of-process (with regard to the UI or
macro) on the local machine.
To determine whether or not Sage Accpac ERP is running on the

local machine (regardless of the session being in-process or out-
of-process), call IsServerMachine instead.
IsServerMachine. (Read-only) Whether or not the application is

running on the same machine as the Sage Accpac ERP server, if
IsRemote is TRUE.
If IsRemote is FALSE (that is, the session is running in-process
with respect to the UI or macro), this property always returns
TRUE since an in-process session is always on the local machine.
Organizations. (Read-only) The AccpacOrganizations object, which is

a collection of all the company databases set up in the current Sage
Accpac ERP installation.
Parent. (Read-only) Returns the parent object as AccpacSession.
ProductSeries. (Read-only) The product series of the current Sage

Accpac ERP installation (for example, whether its Sage Accpac 500
ERP, Sage Accpac 200 ERP, etc.).
ProgramName. (Read-only) The program name of the application.

This is the 6-character Roto ID of the current UI.
The program name is set when the object is initialized by calling
Init.
A Roto ID consists of the two-letter application ID followed by 4

digits.
ProgramsPathOnServer. (Read-only) The DOS path to Sage Accpac

ERP base directory on the server.
This property returns the result of utlGetPlusPath(). When Sage
Accpac ERP is running locally, the path points to a directory on
the users computer. When running remotely, the path is a
local path on the server.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1481

AccpacSession
The Sage Accpac ERP base directory is the directory in which the
Sage Accpac system and program files are installed (on the
server when running remotely).
RightToLeftLanguage. (Read-only) Returns whether the current

user language is a right to left language, as Boolean.
ServerName. (Read-only) The name of the server of a remote session.

Returns if the Sage Accpac ERP is run locally (that is, if
IsRemote is FALSE).
SessionDate. (Read-only) The session date of the current session.

This date is set when the session is opened, and isnt necessarily the
same as the (Windows) system date.
The session date is passed to the sessions Open method. If the
session is opened with an object handle through the Init method,
the current session inherits the session date of the session that
created the object handle.
SharedDataPathOnServer. (Read-only) The DOS path to Sage

Accpac ERP shared data on the server.
This property returns the result of utlGetSitePath(). When Sage
Accpac ERP is running locally, the path points to a directory on
the users computer. When running remotely, the path is a
local path on the server.
The shared data directory is the parent directory (on the server,
if running remotely) of the SITE, USER, and COMPANY
directories.
UserID. (Read-only) The ID (username) of the currently logged in

user. It is the user ID used to open the session.
The user ID is passed to the sessions Open method. If the
session is opened with a valid object handle through the Init
method, the session inherits the user ID of the session that
created the object handle.
UserLanguage. (Read-only) The 3-letter language code of the

preferred language of the currently logged in user.

AccpacView
The preferred language of a user is set by ADMIN in the Users

UI (in Administrative Services).
The currently supported language codes include:
Language Code Language

ARB Arabic
CHN Chinese (Simplified charater set)
CHT Chinese (Traditional character set)
ENG English
ESN Spanish
FRA French
AccpacView
Enables you to access and maintain the database through views. The
AccpacView object also provides information about a view. Each
view is a combination of a logical record (such as an account) or a
logical function and its associated action routines (such as posting).
Not all methods and properties of the AccpacView object are

documented here. For a complete list of properties and methods, use
the Object Browser in VB.

OpenView method AccpacView object.PropertyName/MethodName
AccpacView Methods
BlkGet
Purpose Retrieves the values of multiple fields specified by an array of field

IDs.
Syntax Sub BlkGet(

FieldIDs As Variant,
pValues As Variant)
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1483

AccpacView
Parameters FieldIDs: [in] an array of 1-based field IDs (array of Longs).

pValues: [out] an array of field values associated with the IDs in
FieldIDs.
Return Value None
Example The following example reads the BANK, NAME, and MULTICUR
fields of the view BK0001 and stores them in the variable Values.
Dim BKACCT1header As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacView
mDBLinkCmpRW.OpenView "BK0001", BKACCT1header
Dim Values As Variant

BKACCT1header.BlkGet Array(1, 2, 17), Values
BlkPut
Purpose Assigns new values to multiple fields specified by an array of field

IDs.
Syntax Sub BlkPut(

FieldIDs As Variant,
pValues As Variant,
Verify As Boolean)
Parameters FieldIDs: [in] an array of 1-based field IDs (array of Longs).

pValues: [in] an array of values to assign to the fields whose IDs are
specified in FieldIDs.
Verify: [in] whether the values are checked for integrity prior to
being stored in the fields.
Return Value None
Example The following example puts the array values within the variable
Values into the BANK, NAME, and MULTICUR fields of view
BK0001, without any verification.
Dim Values As Variant

Values = Array("BANKONE", "First City Bank", True)
BKACCT1header.BlkPut Array(1, 2, 17), Values,_ False

AccpacView
Browse
Purpose Starts a query so that the caller can scan through a stream of logical
records. The routine sets the record filtering criteria and direction for
subsequent Read and Fetch calls. The starting key is specified by the
current contents of the logical record.
Syntax Sub Browse(

Filter As String,
Ascending As Boolean)
Parameters Filter: [in] the filter identifier that restricts the logical records to be
selected.
Ascending: [in] whether subsequent records will be fetched in
ascending (TRUE) or descending (FALSE) order.
Return Value None
Example The following example uses a filter so that the program will start its
scan at the record whose bank code is equal to or greater than
SEATAC. Since Ascending is TRUE, subsequent records will be
fetched in ascending order.
BKACCT1header.Browse "BANK>=""SEATAC""", True
Cancel
Purpose Rolls back any pending changes to the database. Cancel calls are
used in conjunction with Post calls.
Syntax Sub Cancel()
Parameters None
Return Value None

Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1485

AccpacView
Close
Purpose Closes an open view.
Syntax Sub Close()
Parameters None
Return Value None
Compose
Purpose Links a set of views so that each view within a group can access each
other without having to repeatedly open new copies of the view.
Syntax Sub Compose(ViewOrArrayOfViews As Variant)
Parameters ViewOrArrayOfViews: [in] the AccpacView object or an array of

AccpacView objects to which the view is composed.
Return Value None
Example The following example composes the header view (CS0005) with the
detail view (CS0006).
Dim CSRATES1header As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacView
mDBLinkSysRW.OpenView "CS0005", CSRATES1header
Dim CSRATES1detail As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacView

mDBLinkSysRW.OpenView "CS0006", CSRATES1detail
CSRATES1header.Compose Array(CSRATES1detail)
Delete
Purpose Removes the logical record from the database.
If an error occurs, the On Error statement in VB is invoked.
Syntax Sub Delete()
Parameters None
Return Value None

AccpacView
Example The following example deletes the currency code NZD from the
currency rates database table.
Dim CSCURCODES1 As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacView
mDBLinkSysRW.OpenView "CS0003", CSCURCODES1
CSCURCODES1.Fields("CURID").Value = "NZD"
CSCURCODES1.Read
CSCURCODES1.Delete
Fetch
Purpose Retrieves the next logical record according to the direction and filter
set in the last Browse call.
Syntax Function Fetch() As Boolean
Parameters None
Return Value Returns whether or not a record is retrieved. (If the end of the table is
reached, FALSE is returned. If an error occurs, the On Error
statement in VB is invoked.)
Example The following example starts scanning at the record whose bank
code is equal to or greater than SEATAC; then fetches all
subsequent records until the end of the table is reached, or an error
occurs. By specifying TRUE as the Ascending parameter in the
Browse method, records will be fetched in ascending order.
Dim Status as Boolean

Status = BKACCT1header.Fetch
Do While Status = True
Status = BKACCT1header.Fetch
Loop
GoBottom
Purpose Retrieves the last logical record in the view according to the direction
and filter set in the last Browse call.
Syntax Function GoBottom() As Boolean

Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1487

AccpacView
Parameters None
Return Value Returns whether or not a record is retrieved. (If the table is empty, or
if no records match the filter set in the last Browse call, FALSE is
returned. If an error occurs, the On Error statement in VB is
invoked.)
Example The following example retrieves the last record whose bank code is
less than SEATAC. By specifying TRUE as the Ascending
parameter in the Browse method, ascending order is used to
determine the last record.

BKACCT1header.Browse "BANK<""SEATAC""", True
Status = BKACCT1header.GoBottom
If Status = False Then
MsgBox "There are no banks before SEATAC."
Exit Sub
End If
GoNext
Purpose Retrieves the next logical record in the view according to the
direction and filter set in the last Browse call.
Syntax Function GoNext() As Boolean
Parameters None
Return Value Returns whether or not a record is retrieved. (If the end of the table is
reached, FALSE is returned. If an error occurs, the On Error
code is equal to or greater than SEATAC; then retrieves all
subsequent records until the end of the table is reached, or an error
occurs. By specifying TRUE as the Ascending parameter in the
Browse method, ascending order is used to determine the next
record.

AccpacView


Status = BKACCT1header.GoNext
Status = BKACCT1header.GoNext
Loop
GoPrev
Purpose Retrieves the previous logical record in the view according to the
Syntax Function GoPrev() As Boolean
Parameters None
Return Value Returns whether or not a record is retrieved. (If the beginning of the
table is reached, FALSE is returned. If an error occurs, the On Error
code is equal to or less than SEATAC; then retrieves all previous
records until the beginning of the table is reached, or an error occurs.
By specifying TRUE as the Ascending parameter in the Browse
method, ascending order is used to determine the previous record.

BKACCT1header.Browse "BANK<=""SEATAC""", True
Status = BKACCT1header.GoPrev
Status = BKACCT1header.GoPrev
Loop
GoTop
Purpose Retrieves the first logical record in the view according to the
Syntax Function GoTop() As Boolean

Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1489

AccpacView
Parameters None
Return Value Returns whether or not a record is retrieved. (If the table is empty, or
if no records match the filter set in the last Browse call, FALSE is
returned. If an error occurs, the On Error statement in VB is
invoked.)
Example The following example retrieves the first record whose bank code is
greater than SEATAC. By specifying TRUE as the Ascending
parameter in the Browse method, ascending order is used to
determine the first record.

BKACCT1header.Browse "BANK>""SEATAC""", True
Status = BKACCT1header.GoTop
MsgBox "There are no banks after SEATAC."
Exit Sub
End If
Init
Purpose Blanks, zeroes, or defaults (depending on the field type) the contents
of each field in a view.
Syntax Sub Init()
Parameters None
Return Value None
Example The following example initializes the fields of view CS0006.

Dim CSRATES1detail As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacView
mDBLinkSysRW.OpenView "CS0006", CSRATES1detail
CSRATES1detail.Init

AccpacView
Insert
Purpose Creates a new record in the database from the contents of the current
logical record. The key must not currently exist in the database. The
integrity of the record is automatically checked, and, if the integrity
check fails, the record is not added. If the record already exists, or if
it is not added to the database, the On Error statement in VB is
invoked.
Inserting a record in the database causes the key being used to be

reset to the primary key, positioned on the record inserted. If the
defined key is not the primary one, the position must be re-
established, so that Fetch will operate properly.
Syntax Sub Insert()
Parameters None
Return Value None
Example The following example opens the rate type view CS0004 and creates
(inserts) the rate type AV.
Dim CSRATETYPS1 As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacView
mDBLinkSysRW.OpenView "CS0004", CSRATETYPS1
Dim CSRATETYPS1Fields As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacViewFields
Set CSRATETYPS1Fields = CSRATETYPS1.Fields
CSRATETYPS1Fields("RATETYPE").Value = "AV"
CSRATETYPS1Fields("RATEDESC").PutWithoutVerification_
("Monthly average rate")
CSRATETYPS1.Insert
Post
Purpose Commits any pending changes to the database, functionally

operating as Insert and Update do, although Post is most useful
for a view that is maintaining a batch of records, not just a single
record.
Syntax Sub Post()

Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1491

AccpacView
Parameters None
Return Value None
Example For an example of how to use Post, see the macro Getrate.xls, which
is provided with Sage Accpac ERP (installed into C:\Program
Files\Sage Accpac\MACROS).
Process
Purpose Used by special types of views to initiate operations such as year-end

processing. These operations do not map nicely to the standard view
operation such as Insert, Delete, Update and Post.
Syntax Sub Process()
Parameters None
Return Value None
Remarks Immediately after the Process operation, use the LastReturnCode

property to get the return code from that operation. A return code of
0 indicates success, a negative return code indicates a warning, and a
positive return code indicates an error. (If an error occurs, the On
Error statement in VB is also invoked.)
Example The following example calls Process on the BK0105 view to indicate
that the program wants to add/modify checks and deposits, as long
as another program isnt doing the same thing at the same time.
Dim BKPROC1 As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacView
mDBLinkCmpRW.OpenView "BK0105", BKPROC1
Dim BKPROC1Fields As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacViewFields
Set BKPROC1Fields = BKPROC1.Fields
BKPROC1Fields("PROCESS").PutWithoutVerification "2"
Bank Process
BKPROC1Fields("OPERATION").PutWithoutVerification "0"
Process Status
Dim rc As tagViewReturnCode
BKPROC1.Process
rc = BKPROC1.LastReturnCode

AccpacView
Read
Purpose Fetches the logical record indexed by the current contents of the
views key fields. This method ignores any filters set in Browse calls.
If there are composite views, the caller is usually responsible for
reading them in as well, although this varies by view.
Syntax Function Read() As Boolean
Parameters None
Return Value Returns whether or not the record is retrieved. (If the record is not
found, FALSE is returned. If an error occurs, the On Error statement
in VB is invoked.)
Example The following example opens the rate type view CS0004 and
retrieves (reads) the rate type SP.
CSRATETYPS1.Fields("RATETYPE").Value = "SP"

Status = CSRATETYPS1.Read
Msgbox "The SP record does not exist."
Exit Sub
End If
Update
Purpose Writes the contents of the existing logical record back to the database
using the current key. If the key fields have been altered, use the
Insert method instead. If there are composite views, you must
update them as necessary.
If an error occurs (for example, because the key fields have been
altered), the On Error statement in VB is invoked.
Syntax Sub Update()
Parameters None
Return Value None

Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1493

AccpacView
Example The following example opens the rate type view CS0004, retrieves
(reads) the rate type SP, and changes the rate type description to
Daily spot rate before updating the rate type record.
CSRATETYPS1.Fields("RATETYPE").Value = "SP"

Status = CSRATETYPS1.Read
Msgbox "The SP record does not exist."
Exit Sub
End If
CSRATETYPS1.Fields("RATEDESC").PutWithoutVerification
_("Daily spot rate")
CSRATETYPS1.Update
Verify
Purpose Checks the referential integrity of the views current record. Do this
check prior to writing the record to the database, particularly if any
fields were put into the view without field-level verification.
Syntax Sub Verify()
Parameters None
Return Value None
Remarks Immediately after the Verify call, use the LastReturnCode property
to get the return code from the referential integrity check. A return
code of 0 indicates success, a negative return code indicates a
warning, and a positive return code indicates an error. (If an error
occurs, the On Error statement in VB is also invoked.)
AccpacView Properties
CompositeNames. (Read-only) The AccpacViewCompositeNames
collection object that contains the names of the subviews that are
composed to the view.
Description. (Read-only) The descriptive name of the view.

AccpacView
Dirty. (Read-only) Whether or not fields in the logical record have

been altered.
Exists. (Read-only) Whether or not the current logical record exists in

the database.
Fields. (Read-only) The AccpacViewFields collection object that

contains the views available fields.
Keys. (Read-only) The AccpacViewKeys collection object that

contains the views available keys.
LastReturnCode. (Read-only) The (view) API return code of the latest

view operation (for example, Process).
Order. The key specifier that determines the order in which the
view is accessed.
ReferentialIntegrity. The referential integrity flag for the view.
Security. (Read-only) The access rights assigned to the current user

for the view. Returns a combination of the following flags:

0x001L New records can be added VIEW_SEC_ADD
0x002L Records can be modified VIEW_SEC_MODIFY
0x004L Records can be deleted VIEW_SEC_DELETE
0x008L Records can be read VIEW_SEC_INQUIRE
0x010L Records can be posted VIEW_SEC_POST
Session. (Read-only) The session to which the view is indirectly

attached.
SystemAccess. The system access mode for the view. The view may
behave differently for different access modes. The system access
mode can be one of the following values:

0 Normal mode VIEW_SYSACCS_NORMAL
1 Import mode VIEW_SYSACCS_IMPORT
2 Export mode VIEW_SYSACCS_EXPORT
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1495

AccpacViewField

3 View is being accessed by VIEW_SYSACCS_
an integrity checker INTEGRITY_CHECK
4 View is being accessed by VIEW_SYSACCS_MACRO
a macro
5 View is being accessed by VIEW_SYSACCS_ACTIVATION
an activation object
6 Data conversion mode VIEW_SYSACCS_CONVERSION
10 View is being accessed by VIEW_SYSACCS_POSTING
a posting object
TemplateDate. (Read-only) The date of the template used to create

the view.
TemplateVer. (Read-only) The version of the template used to create

the view.
Type. (Read-only) The type of the view.

1 A base view ROTO_VIEW
2 A subclass view ROTO_VIEW_SUBCLASS
3 A stub view ROTO_VIEW_STUB
ViewID. (Read-only) The Roto ID of the view. This string must be of

the form GL1000 two letters followed by 4 digits.
AccpacViewField
Provides information about the field in the view and enables you to
set the fields value.
1. AccpacSession object OpenDBLink (or GetDBLink) method

OpenView method AccpacView object Fields property
Item method AccpacViewField.PropertyName/MethodName

OpenView method AccpacView object Keys property

AccpacViewField
Item method Field property

AccpacViewField.PropertyName/MethodName
AccpacViewField Methods
GetInfo
Purpose Retrieves all of the fields information in one call.
Syntax Sub GetInfo(

Index As Long,
ID As Long,
Name As String,
Description As String,
Type As tagFieldTypeEnum,
Attribs As tagFieldAttributeEnum,
Size As Integer,
Precision As Integer,
MaxValue As Variant,
MinValue As Variant,
PresentationType As tagFieldPresentationTypeEnum,
PresentationMask As String,
Value As Variant)
Parameters Index: [out] the fields 0-based index in the AccpacViewFields

collection.
ID: [out] the field ID corresponding to the 1-based field index as
defined in the view.
Name: [out] the field name.
Description: [out] the field description.
Type: [out] the field type.
Attribs: [out] the attributes of the current state of the field.
Size: [out] the number of bytes of storage required by the field.
Precision: [out] the number of decimal places, if Type is FLD_BCD.
MaxValue: [out] the maximum value of the field, according to the
field type.
MinValue: [out] the minimum value of the field, according to the
field type.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1497

AccpacViewField
PresentationType: [out] the type of presentation information for the

field.
PresentationMask: [out] the presentation mask of the field.
Value: [out] the value stored in the field.
Return Value None
PutWithoutVerification
Purpose Stores a new value in a field without verifying its integrity.
Syntax Sub PutWithoutVerification(pNewVal As Variant)
Parameters pNewVal: The new value to be stored in the field.
Return Value None
Example The following example stores the value Monthly average rate in
the RATEDESC field without verifying its integrity, for the rate type
AV.
Dim CSRATETYPS1Fields As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacViewFields
Set CSRATETYPS1Fields = CSRATETYPS1.Fields
CSRATETYPS1Fields("RATETYPE").Value = "AV"
CSRATETYPS1Fields("RATEDESC").PutWithoutVerification_
"Monthly average rate"
CSRATETYPS1.Insert
SetToMax
Purpose Sets the field to the maximum value according to the field type.
Syntax Sub SetToMax()
Parameters None
Return Value None

AccpacViewField
SetToMin
Purpose Sets the field to the minimum value according to the field type.
Syntax Sub SetToMin()
Parameters None
Return Value None
AccpacViewField Properties
Attributes. (Read-only) A bitset of status indicators and attributes of
the current state of a field. Returns one of the following values (in
hexadecimal), or a combination:

0x001L Field has changed. FLD_CHANGED
0x002L Field is accessible and can be FLD_ENABLED
meaningfully used.
0x004L Field can be edited. FLD_EDITABLE
0x008L Field is a segment of the current FLD_KEY
key for the view.
0x010L Fields value has been FLD_CALCULATE
calculated from other fields.
0x020L Fields type, size, or precision FLD_TYPE
may change.
0x040L Fields presentation mask or list FLD_PRESENTATION
(strings) may change.
0x080L Field is required for inserting a FLD_REQUIRED
record.
0x100L FLD_EDITABLE may change. FLD_CHECKEDITABLE
Description. (Read-only) The description of the field.
ID. (Read-only) The 1-based field ID corresponding to the field index

as defined in the view.
Index. (Read-only) The 0-based index of the field in the

AccpacViewFields collection.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 1499

AccpacViewField
MaxValue. (Read-only) The maximum value of the field according to

the field type.
MinValue. (Read-only) The minimum value of the field according to

the field type.
Name. (Read-only) The name of the field.
Precision. (Read-only) The number of decimal places, if the field type

is FLD_BCD (see the Type property).
PresentationMask. (Read-only) The presentation mask of the field.
PresentationStrings. (Read-only) The fields external presentation

definitions. Returns the AccpacViewFieldPresentsStrings collection.
PresentationType. (Read-only) The type of presentation information

for the field (that is, whether there is a presentation mask or
presentation strings for the field).
Returns one of the following values (in hexadecimal):

0x20 No presentation information. FLD_PRESENTS_NONE
0x4C Presentation strings. FLD_PRESENTS_LIST
0x4D Presentation mask. FLD_PRESENTS_MASK
Size. (Read-only) The number of bytes of storage required by the

field.
Type. (Read-only) The type of field. Returns one of the following

values:
Description
Visual Basic
Value Data Type Stored in database as: Constant
1 String ASCII (blank padded) FLD_CHAR
2 String Binary (not necessarily FLD_BYTE
printable)
3 Date Decimal FLD_DATE
4 Date Decimal FLD_TIME
5 Double 8 byte IEEE long real FLD_REAL

AccpacViewKey
Description
Visual Basic
Value Data Type Stored in database as: Constant
6 Decimal BCD FLD_BCD
7 Integer 16-bit signed integer FLD_INT
8 Long 32-bit signed integer FLD_LONG
9 Boolean 16-bit signed integer FLD_BOOL
Value. The contents of the field. If you assign a new value to the
field, the value is automatically verified. If the value fails
verification, the value is not stored.
View. (Read-only) The name of the view to which the field belongs.
AccpacViewKey
Provides information about the key of a view.

OpenView method AccpacView object Keys property Item
method AccpacViewKey object.PropertyName
AccpacViewKey Properties
Field. (Read-only) The AccpacViewField object corresponding to its
0-based index in the AccpacViewKey object (which is a collection of
key fields).
FieldCount. (Read-only) The number of fields in the key.
FieldValues. An array of all the values of the fields in the key.
Name. (Read-only) The name of the key.

Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 14101

Collections
Collections
AccpacActiveApp (Collection)
(All properties are read-only) Contains a collection of
AccpacApplication objects that describe the activated applications of
a company database. This object cannot be created directly by an
application, but must be obtained from the GetActiveApp method of
an AccpacDBLink object.

GetActiveApp method AccpacActiveApp
collection.PropertyName/MethodName
AccpacActiveApp Methods
Item
Purpose Retrieves an AccpacApplication object specified by its 0-based index

in the collection or by its two-letter application ID.
Syntax activeApp.Item(Index)
Because the Item method is the default for all collections, you do not
have to specify Item.
For example, the following syntax forms are interchangeable:
activeApp.Item(0)
activeApp(0)
activeApp.Item(name)
activeApp(name)
Parameters Index: [in] the 0-based index of the item in the collection or the two-
letter application ID.

AccpacErrors (Collection)
Return Value Returns the AccpacApplication object corresponding to the supplied

index.
Example The following example displays the version of Administrative

Services in a message box:
Set Session = CreateObject(ACCPAC.Session")
Session.Open "ADMIN", "ADMIN", "SAMLTD", Date, 0,

Set mDBLinkSysRW = Session.OpenDBLink(DBLINK_SYSTEM,
DBLINK_FLAG_READWRITE)
MsgBox mDBLinkSysRW.GetActiveApp.Item("AS").PgmVer
AccpacActiveApp Properties
Count. The number of activated applications in the current
company database. The number of activated applications
corresponds to the number of AccpacApplication objects available
from this object.
(All properties are read-only) Provides access to error (and information)
messages and details generated during the current session. This
object is obtained from the Errors property of an AccpacSession
object.
AccpacSession object Errors property AccpacErrors

AccpacErrors Methods
Clear
Purpose Clears all of the errors in the collection (that is, the error stack).
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 14103

Syntax Sub Clear()
Parameters None
Example The following example clears the Errors collection after the program
displays each error.
Dim Errors As AccpacErrors
Dim nCnt As Long
Set Errors = Session.Errors

nCnt = Errors.Count
If nCnt = 0 Then
Else
Dim idx As Long For idx = 0 To (nCnt 1)
MsgBox Errors(idx) Next idx
Errors.Clear End If
GenerateErrorFile
Purpose Generates a temporary file that stores the errors in the collection.
Syntax Function GenerateErrorFile() As String
Parameters None
Return Value Returns the path (including filename) to the generated file.
Remarks When Sage Accpac ERP is running remotely, the temporary file is
generated on the server, and the path to that file is a DOS path that is
local to the server (as opposed to a URL).
Get
Purpose Retrieves an error message based on its 0-based index in the

collection. This method also returns all of the related information for
the error message.
Syntax Sub Get(

Index As Long,
pMsg As String,

pPriority As tagErrorPriority,
pSource As String,
pErrCode As String,
pHelpFile As String,
pHelpID As Long)
Parameters Index: [in] the 0-based index of the error message in the list.
pMsg: [out] the error message.
pPriority: [out] the error priority.
pSource: [out] the source of the error.
pErrCode: [out] the error code.
pHelpFile: [out] the help file name.
pHelpID: [out] the help context ID.
Return Value None
Item
Purpose Returns an error message based on its 0-based index in the

collection.
For example, the following syntax forms are interchangeable:
Errors.Item(0)
Errors(0)
Parameters Index: [in] the 0-based index of the item in the collection.
Return Value Returns the error message at the specified index. (Use the Get
method to obtain other information about the error.)
Example See the example in the Clear method.
Put
Purpose Adds an error message to the collection.
Syntax Sub Put(

Msg As String,
Priority As tagErrorPriority,
[Params As Variant],
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 14105

[Source As String],
[ErrCode As String],
[HelpFile As String],
[HelpContextID As Long])
Parameters Msg: [in] the error message.

Priority: [in] the error priority.
Params: [in, optional] an array of parameters for the error message.
This must be in the form of an array of Variants.
Source: [in, optional] the source of the error.
ErrCode: [in, optional] the error code.
HelpFile: [in, optional] the help file name.
HelpContextID: [in, optional] the help context ID.
Return Value None
Remarks The error message could be plain text, or a string with replacement
tokens. Replacement tokens take the form %n, where n is a number
starting from 1. When replacement tokens are present in the error
message, they are replaced by the value in the corresponding
position in the Params array.
Use PutRscMsg if the error message comes from an applications

server-side resource file.
PutRscMsg
Purpose Adds an error message to the collection from an applications server-

side resource file.
Syntax Sub PutRscMsg(

AppID As String,
rscID As Long,
Priority As tagErrorPriority,
[Params As Variant],
[Source As String],
[ErrCode As String],
[HelpFile As String],
[HelpContextID As Long])

AccpacOrganizations (Collection)

rscID: [in] the resource ID of the error message string.
Priority: [in] the error priority.
Params: [in, optional] an array of parameters for the error message.
This must be in the form of an array of Variants.
Source: [in, optional] the source of the error.
ErrCode: [in, optional] the error code.
HelpFile: [in, optional] the help file name.
HelpContextID: [in, optional] the help context ID.
Return Value None
Remarks The error message is retrieved from the applications server-side

string resource file identified by the AppID and rscID. The error
message could be plain text, or a string with replacement tokens.
Replacement tokens take the form %n, where n is a number starting
from 1. When replacement tokens are present in the error message,
they are replaced by the value in the corresponding position in the
Params array.
PutRscMsg can be used to display error messages whose strings

come from other applications. (For example, a Bank Services UI can
use PutRscMsg to display an error message whose string comes from
the Common Services server-side resource file.)
AccpacErrors Properties
Count. The number of items (errors) in the collection.
Provides access to details of all the Sage Accpac ERP databases set
up in Database Setup. Details of each database are exposed through
an AccpacOrganization object. The AccpacOrganizations object
exposes a collection of AccpacOrganization objects.
The AccpacOrganizations object must be obtained from the

Organizations property of an AccpacSession object.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 14107

AccpacOrganizations Methods
GetOrgsInfo
Purpose Gets database (organization) information for all companies in one

call.
Syntax Sub GetOrgsInfo(

Count As Long,
DatabaseIDs() As String,
Names() As String,
SystemDatabaseIDs() As String,
Types() As Integer,
SecEnabled() As Boolean)
Parameters Count: [out] the total number of company and system databases
(that is, the number of items in each array).
DatabaseIDs: [out] an array of company and system database IDs.
Names: [out] an array where each item is the name of the company
(or system database) associated with the corresponding item in
DatabaseIDs.
SystemDatabaseIDs: [out] an array where each item is either the
associated system database ID, if the corresponding item in
DatabaseIDs is a company database, or , if the corresponding item
in DatabaseIDs is a system database.
Types: [out] an array where each item is the database type thats
associated with the corresponding item in DatabaseIDs. Each item in
this array is actually a constant in tagDBLinkTypeEnum.
SecEnabled: [out] an array where each item indicates whether or not
security is enabled for the corresponding item in DatabaseIDs.
Return Value None
Item
Purpose Retrieves an AccpacOrganization object that represents the company
specified by the organization ID.
Syntax Organizations.Item(OrgID As String)

have to specify Item. For example, the following syntax forms are
interchangeable:
Organizations.Item(OrgID)
Organizations(OrgID)
Parameters OrgID: [in] the organization ID.
Return Value Returns the AccpacOrganization object representing the company

specified by the organization ID.
Next
Purpose Retrieves an object that represents a company set up in the system. If

Next is called after calling Reset, the first company in the list is
retrieved. Subsequent calls to Next would navigate through the list
and return the next company.
Syntax Function Next(pVal As AccpacOrganization) As Boolean
Parameters pVal: [out] an AccpacOrganization object that represents a company

set up in the system.
Return Value Returns whether or not information on the next company is

available.
Reset
Purpose Resets and re-reads database setup information from the system. A
subsequent call to Next would retrieve the first company.
Syntax Sub Reset()
Parameters None
Return Value None

Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 14109

AccpacViewCompositeNames (Collection)
AccpacOrganizations Properties
Count. Returns the number of company and system databases in the
collection.
AccpacViewCompositeNames (Collection)
(All properties are read-only) Contains a collection of subview names.
AccpacViewCompositeNames Methods
Item
Purpose Returns the name of the subview, based on its 0-based index in the
collection.
Syntax CompositeNames.Item(Index)
interchangeable:
CompositeNames.Item(0)
CompositeNames(0)
Parameters Index: [in] the 0-based index of the item in the collection.
Return Value Returns the subview name at the specified index.
Example The following example displays the first subview (BK0002) of the
Bank Account view (BK0001) in a message box:
MsgBox BKACCT1header.CompositeNames(0)
AccpacViewCompositeNames Properties
Count. The number of items (subview names) in the collection.

AccpacViewFieldPresentsStrings (Collection)
(All properties are read-only) Contains a collection of view field
presentation strings.

Item method PresentationStrings property
AccpacViewFieldPresentsStrings
2. AccpacSession object OpenDBLink (or GetDBLink)

method OpenView method AccpacView object Keys
property Item method Field property
PresentationStrings property
AccpacViewFieldPresentsStrings
AccpacViewFieldPresentsStrings Methods
GetAll
Purpose Retrieves all of the AccpacViewFieldPresentsStrings collections

properties in one call.
Syntax Sub GetAll(

Count As Long,
Cookies As Variant,
Strings As Variant,
Values As Variant)
Parameters Count: [out] the number of presentation strings in the collection.

Cookies: [out] an array of cookies corresponding to the presentation
strings (array of Longs). The cookies are used for looking up
presentation strings.
Strings: [out] an array of presentation strings (array of Strings).
Values: [out] an array of field values corresponding to the
presentation strings (array of Variants).
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 14111

Return Value None
Refresh
Purpose Refreshes the presentation strings from the view.
Syntax Sub Refresh()
Parameters None
Return Value None
SetFieldValue
Purpose Sets the fields value to the predefined value (that is, the value
corresponding to the presentation string) according to the cookie.
Syntax Sub SetFieldValue(Cookie As Long)
Parameters Cookie: [in] the cookie used to look up the presentation string and its
associated field value.
Return Value None
AccpacViewFieldPresentsStrings Properties
AllPredefinedString. An array of presentation strings. This property
will put the corresponding array of cookies into ([out] parameter)
pCookies.
Syntax: Property AllPredefinedString(pCookies As Variant) As

Variant
Count. The number of items (presentation strings) in the collection.
FieldString. The presentation string corresponding to the current

field value.
PredefinedString. The presentation string (as the return value) and

cookie (in [out] parameter pCookie) according to the ([in] parameter
Index) index.

AccpacViewFields (Collection)
Syntax: Property PredefinedString(Index As Long, pCookie As

Long) As String
PredefinedValue. The value corresponding to a presentation string,

according to the cookie (in [in] parameter Cookie) associated with
that presentation string.
Syntax: Property PredefinedValue(Cookie As Long) As Variant
AccpacViewFields (Collection)
(All properties are read-only) Contains a collection of AccpacViewField
objects (view fields).

AccpacViewFields collection.PropertyName/MethodName
AccpacViewFields Methods
Item
Purpose Returns a specific AccpacViewField object in a collection, specified

by its 0-based index in the collection or by its field name.
Syntax Fields.Item (Index)
interchangeable:
Fields.Item(0)
Fields(0)
Fields.Item(name)
Fields(name)
Parameters Index: [in] the 0-based index of the item in the collection or the field
name.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 14113

AccpacViewKeys (Collection)
Return Value Returns the AccpacViewField object corresponding to the supplied

index.
Example The following example retrieves the NAME field from the Bank
Accounts fields collection:
Dim fldBANK As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacViewField

Set fldBANK = BKACCT1header.Fields(BANK)
AccpacViewFields Properties
Count. The number of items (view fields) in the collection.
FieldByID. The AccpacViewField object corresponding to the 1-based

field index (in [in] parameter ID) as defined in the view.
Syntax: Property FieldByID(ID As Long) As AccpacViewField
FieldByIndex. The AccpacViewField object corresponding to the 0-

based index (in [in] parameter Index) in the collection.
Syntax: Property FieldByIndex(Index As Long) As

AccpacViewField
FieldByName. TheAccpacViewField object corresponding to the

field name (in [in] parameter Name).
Syntax: Property FieldByName(Name As String) As

AccpacViewField
(All properties are read-only) Contains a collection of AccpacViewKey
objects.


OpenView method AccpacView object Keys property
AccpacViewKeys collection.PropertyName/MethodName
AccpacViewKeys Methods
Item
Purpose Returns a specific AccpacViewKey object in a collection, specified by

its 0-based index in the collection or by its key name.
Syntax Keys.Item (Index)
interchangeable:
Keys.Item(0)
Keys(0)
Keys.Item(name)
Keys(name)
Parameters Index: [in] the 0-based index of the item in the collection or the key
name.
Return Value Returns the AccpacViewKey object corresponding to the supplied

index.
Example The following example retrieves the first key from the Bank
Accounts keys collection:
Dim keyBKACCT As AccpacCOMAPI.AccpacViewKey

Set keyBKACCT = BKACCT1header.Keys(0)
AccpacViewKeys Properties
Count. The number of items (view keys) in the collection.
Writing VBA
Macros
User Guide 14115

Transactions
Scheduling
Chapter 15
Scheduling Recurring Transactions
Creating Schedules ............................................................ 151
Schedule Details Window .................................................. 155
Reminder List ................................................................. 156
Processing Schedules ...................................................... 158
User Guide 15i


Transactions
Scheduling
Chapter 15
Scheduling Recurring Transactions
This chapter explains how to schedule recurring transactions, using
the Sage Accpac ERP Scheduling feature. Scheduling is a function of
Common Services.
Schedules can be set up for a particular user to process or for any

user to process. Each user however, must have authorization.
The Scheduling folder contains two icons, Reminder List, and

Schedules. You set up schedules for recurring transactions in the
Schedules form, then process schedules from the Reminder List. You
can also set up schedules that can be processed only from subledgers
(these schedules will not appear in the Reminder List).
Creating Schedules
You can create daily, weekly, semi-monthly, monthly, or yearly
schedules to process any number of recurring transactions from any
or all of your subledgers.
Schedules are usually created in the Schedule window in Common

Services. You can also create schedules while you are creating
recurring transactions in subledgers. (See the application guides for
information about recurring transactions.)
Schedule code To avoid confusion, give schedules unique codes and descriptions
suggestion
that reflect how they will be used, for example:
Example of a MONTHEND. This 8-character code shows the type of transaction

schedule code
being processed.
User Guide 151

Creating Schedules
Example of a Month End. This description reflects the code, and describes the
description
schedule.
Note that codes can have a maximum of 12 characters, while

descriptions can be up to 60 characters long.
To create schedules:
Schedules 1. Open the Scheduling folder in Common Services, then double-

icon
click the Schedules icon.
2. In the Schedule Code field, type a code, (for example,

MONTHLY).
3. Type a description for the code.
Reminders section 4. In the Remind field of the Reminders section, you select Specific
User, All Users, or No Users from the drop-down list.
Specific User. Select this option, then enter a user ID in the

accompanying field (or use the Finder to select a user ID) to
choose a specific user who will process the schedule.
Security If a user does not belong to a security group assigned to perform

restriction
scheduling tasks, they will not be allowed to process the
schedule unless the system administrator changes their security
access.
All Users. Select this option to allow any user who has been
given scheduling authorization to be able to process any
schedules set to this option.

Transactions
Creating Schedules
Scheduling
More than one If more than one user is working with the same company
user
database, or another user opens the database after a schedule has
been processed, the other users will not see that schedule in their
All Due Personal schedules list. (This prevents schedules from
being processed more than once in the same session.)
No Users. When you select this option, users will not see a
Reminder List for that schedule when they open the company
database. In this case, recurring transactions attached to that
schedule must be processed in the subledgers.
Optional 5. To allow users to receive reminders prior to the date schedules

are to be processed, enter a number in the Remind in Advance
field. When you are creating a schedule, the field defaults to the
current session date. The date you enter is displayed in a read-
only field in the Schedule Details window.
6. Choose a date using the calendar icon beside the Schedule Start
Date field.
Recurring Periods / 7. In the Recurring Periods and Frequency sections, choose one of
Frequency section
the following options:
Daily. Schedule processing to take place every number of days,

or always on the same days.
User Guide 153

Creating Schedules
Weekly. Schedule weekly transactions on a particular day of the

chosen week.
Semi-monthly. Choose the first or last day of the month with

any other day of the month.
Monthly. Choose a particular month, a certain day of that

month, or the first, second, third, fourth, or last specific day of
that month.
Yearly. Choose a month, then choose the day of the month, or

choose the month, and then choose the first, second, third,
fourth, or last specific day of that month.
8. Click the Add button to add this schedule, then repeat these
steps to create other schedules.

Transactions
Creating Schedules
Scheduling
9. Open Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable, or General
Ledger, and attach your recurring transactions to the schedules
you have created. (To create recurring transactions, follow the
instructions in application guides.)
Note: You can attach recurring transactions from all

subledgers to the same schedule.
Buttons section The following buttons appear on the Schedule window:
Add/Save button. Adds the new schedule youve created, or saves

an edited schedule.
Delete button. Deletes the open schedule.
Details button. Opens the following window to display all the

recurring transactions attached to the open schedule:
Schedule Details
window
Read-only fields
Schedule Details Window

The Schedule Details window displays the following columns:
Application. Displays the application where the recurring

transaction originated (for example, Accounts Receivable).
Job Types. Displays the kind of transaction.
User Guide 155

Reminder List
Description. Displays the recurring transaction description, the

recurring transaction code, and (depending on the subledger)
the vendor or customer code.
Last Run Date. Displays the date the recurring transaction was
last processed. (Do not confuse this date with the Schedule Last
Run Date field also in this window, that shows the last run date
of the schedule to which this transaction is attached.)
Next Run Date. Displays the next date that the recurring
transaction is to be processed.
The Schedule Details window includes these read-only fields:
Schedule Start Date. Displays the first date that a schedule

should be processed. The Schedule Start Date is a read-only field
in the Schedule Details window, but appears as an editable field
in the Schedules window.
Last Run Date. Displays the date the schedule was last
processed. (Do not confuse this date with the column labeled
Last Run Date, which is the date the highlighted recurring
transaction attached to this schedule was last processed.)
Reminder List
When schedules are due to be processed, the Reminder List opens.
The Reminder List includes a drop-down List field and Schedule
Code, Description, Processed, Run Date, Last Run Date, and Remind
columns, as described below:
List field. The schedule types that a user can view are
determined by their user group security rights, and include:
Due Personal Schedules: Displays all the schedules

assigned to the signed-on user that are due on the session
date or that are to be processed on a date after the session
date. (Users do not need Maintain Schedules security
authorization to view schedules in this category.)

Transactions
Reminder List
Scheduling
All Personal Schedules: Displays all the schedules assigned
to the signed-on user. (Users do not need Maintain
Schedules security authorization to view schedules in this
category.)
Due Assigned Schedules: Displays all the schedules

assigned to all users that are due on the session date or are to
be processed shortly after the session date. (Users must have
Maintain Schedules security authorization to view schedules
in this category.)
All Assigned Schedules: Displays all schedules that have

been assigned to all users or all specified users. (Users must
have Maintain Schedules security authorization to view
schedules in this category.)
Schedule Code / Description. Schedule codes and their

descriptions appear in these two columns.
Reminders. User IDs in this column identify the users who have
been assigned to process the displayed schedules.
Processed. Indicates whether due schedules have been

processed. After a schedule is processed, Yes appears in this
column, and the Last Run Date column displays the current
session date.
Run Date. This column displays the date that unprocessed

schedules are to be processed, based on the choices set in the
Schedule.
Last Run Date. Displays the most recent processing date of a

schedule. This field will be blank if the schedule has never been
run. The last run date also appears on the Schedules Details
window, in a read-only field.
Schedule button. To view details about a highlighted schedule,

click the Schedule button. The Schedule form opens. (You can
then click the Details button on the Schedule window to view all
transactions attached to the highlighted schedule.)
User Guide 157

Reminder List
Process button. Choose this button to process a highlighted

schedule.
The Reminder List window looks like this:
Processing Schedules
The Reminder List appears if schedules set to All Users or
Specific User, are due to be processed on the session date or if the
user is being reminded of upcoming processing dates.
To process schedules from the Reminder List:
1. Highlight a Schedule in the Reminder List.
2. Choose the Process button. All transactions attached to that

schedule are immediately processed.
The Schedule Last Run Date field (read-only) in the Schedule

Details window is updated to the current session date.
The Last Run Date column (for the processed schedule) in the
Reminder List is updated to the current session date.
3. Choose the Close button to exit from the Reminder List.
For instructions about posting recurring transactions, refer to

your application guides.

Transactions
Reminder List
Scheduling
If Reminder type is When you set up a schedule with No Users as the reminder type,
No Users
the schedule does not appear in the Reminder List. Users must
process recurring transactions attached to such a schedule directly
from the Create Recurring Batches windows in each application.
Refer to application guides for instructions.
User Guide 159

Smug54-a.doc, printed on 5/1/2006, at 4:18:42 PM. Last saved on 5/1/2006 4:18:00 PM.
Appendix A
Error Messages
Error Messages
Criteria error.................................................................. A1
Damaged data ................................................................ A2
Import/export file problem ..................................................... A6
Incorrect procedure............................................................ A7
Insufficient disk space ......................................................... A8
Insufficient memory ........................................................... A9
Internal error ................................................................ A10
Invalid input ................................................................. A12
Invalid Input. Password must be at least X characters long ................... A12
Invalid Input. Password must contain both letters and digits.................. A12
Invalid input. Passwords may not be re-used ................................ A12
Invalid input. User ID has been disabled .................................... A13
Invalid input. User ID has been locked out. ................................. A13
Invalid input. User ID is not authorized to sign on at this time ................ A13
Invalid input. User password may not be changed ........................... A13
Operating system limit reached ................................................ A13
Password change is required .................................................. A14
Program file problem ......................................................... A14
System error ................................................................. A16
System file problem .......................................................... A17
System limit reached ......................................................... A18
The macro being recorded has used the available macro file space. ............ A18
Out of links............................................................... A18
Out of connections. ....................................................... A18
User Guide Ai


Appendix A
Error Messages
Error Messages
Error messages are one of the types of messages that appear in
message dialogs in Sage Accpac ERP. The other types are Warnings
and Confirmations.
Warnings alert the user to possible problems or situations that

require action or decision. Warnings contain OK and Help buttons.
You must choose OK to acknowledge the warning.
Confirmations ask the user to make a choice before the program can
proceed. Confirmations contain Yes, No, Cancel, and Help buttons.
Error messages identify conditions that prevent the program from

proceeding. In most cases, error messages start with a phrase (a
category), such as System error or Incorrect procedure, followed
by a sentence that describes the problem more specifically. In some
cases, suggestions for action to take are included in the dialog box.
For information about the steps to follow to correct an error, you

should look up the error category, either in this appendix or in a list
of categories that appears when you choose the Help button in the
dialog box.
Criteria error
Problem The criteria you have defined for your macro or financial statement
contain errors or are too complex to evaluate.
Solution If the message indicates that the error is a syntax error, note the
reason for the error and edit the criteria.
User Guide A1

Damaged data
If the message indicates that the criteria is too complex or is

incorrect, reduce the number of conditions in the criteria and make
sure the remaining conditions are correctly set.
Damaged data
Problem The data contains damaged files or there are files missing.
Solution 1. Write down the message in case you need to consult a

technician.
2. Before leaving the application, check the reports and listings you
have on file for the data to determine whether they contain
complete and up-to-date information that would allow you to
reconstruct your data if you need to.
If the information you have on file is not up to date, you may be

able to print new reports. Be sure to try to print the reports and
listings before leaving the application. Once you have left the
application, you may not be able to start it again.
If you cannot use the printing functions, skip the remainder of

this step, and go directly to step 3.
You may be able to use the printed reports to:
Pinpoint the problems in the data.
Provide a record of data to be re-entered after an earlier

backup is restored.
Verify the data after it is repaired.
Reports and listings you may want to print include:
Batch Listings. Print listings of all unposted batches to

provide details of unposted transactions you may have to re-
enter.
A2 Sage Accpac System Manager

Damaged data
Posting Journals. Print all current journals to provide details

of posted transactions. You may need to re-enter these
transactions or use the journals to identify a transaction that
Error Messages
damaged the data.
Financial Statements. Print up-to-date copies of your

balance sheet and income statement (Financial Statements
window).
Chart of Accounts. If you have added or revised accounts

since you made your last backup, print this report for all
accounts, choosing the report formats you need (Chart of
Accounts Report window).
Posted Transactions Listing. Use the listing to check the

transactions posted to the accounts (Posted Transactions
Listing window).
Batch Status Report. Print complete batch information for

all types of batches. This report helps you track all unposted
batches and the batches you deleted or posted since you last
cleared the data for the report.
Trial Balance. Print an up-to-date copy of your trial balance

(Trial Balance Report window).
Other Reports. If you do not have recent listings of other

reports produced by the application, such as Financial
Statements and the Chart of Accounts in General Ledger,
print copies of these reports to update your files.
3. Leave Sage Accpac ERP and back up the directories where your
Shared Data, system, and company data is stored, using your
standard procedure for backup.
Shared Data is located in the . . .\SITE, \COMPANY, and

. . .\USER directories. This is data that is shared by all your
companies and systems.
System data is located in . . .\DATA\systemdatabaseID (or in

whichever directory the system administrator created the
User Guide A3

Damaged data
system database, if the location was not DATA). System data

includes currency and security information.
Company data is located in . . .DATA\companydatabaseID (or

in whichever directory the system administrator created the
company database, if the location was not DATA). Company
data includes the accounting data for all your company
applications, as well as shared company information like the
company profile.
Finding your data Shared data, system, and company data directories are
directories
subdirectories of Sage Accpac ERP (or the base directory
where Sage Accpac ERP was installed).
4. Check your hard drive for errors. (Refer to your operating

system manual for instructions to use CHKDSK or SCANDISK.)
If no disk errors are reported, go to step 5.
If disk errors are reported, fix the problem, then go to step 5.
5. Reset your computer by pressing the Ctrl, Alt, and Del keys
simultaneously, then start Database Setup and choose the Verify
button. This opens the Verify Database dialog box. Click the
Options button to log the errors to an error file. For more
information, see Verifying Databases, in Chapter 4 of the
System Manager Administrator Guide.
6. Leave Database Setup and restart Sage Accpac ERP, selecting the
company you were working with when the problem occurred.
Check the integrity of all your accounting data. For more
information, see Checking Data Integrity, in Chapter 11 of this
guide.
If no errors are reported, the problem may have been resolved. Try
the task again. If the error does not recur, go to step 7.
If errors are reported, go to step 8.
7. Check whether any restart records exist for incomplete

processing. If they do, print a list of the records, fix the errors,

Damaged data
resume processing where it was interrupted, then clear the

restart records. For more information, see Chapter 8 Working
with Restart Records, in the System Manager Administrator
Error Messages
Guide.
If no errors were reported in step 6 and you have completed

step 7, you should delete the files that were created in the root
directory in step 4. You can resume normal processing now. You
do not need to read any further.
8. Leave Sage Accpac ERP and Windows, and at the system

prompt, delete all the files in the directories that you need to
restore data to. Make sure you have backed up all these files before you
delete them, since you will need to use your backup if you cannot
successfully restore accurate data in step 9.
If files were created in the root directory as a result of the disk

check in step 4, you should delete them as well.
9. Restore your company data from the last backup you made
before discovering that your data was damaged. See Restoring
Backup Data, in Chapter 11 of this guide.
10. Restart Sage Accpac ERP and clear any restart records that exist.
11. Check the integrity of the restored data.
If no errors are reported, make a backup of the restored, updated

data. Re-enter transactions and other data that were entered after
you made the backup, then continue using the program.
If errors are reported, restore an earlier backup copy of the data,

then repeat this step. If the earlier data is also damaged or you
do not have an earlier backup, consult a technician. You will
then need the backup copy (made in step 3) of the most recent
version of the damaged data.
User Guide A5

Import/export file problem
Complete all steps If you were directed to follow these instructions as part of the
recovery for another error message, return to the instructions for the
other message to determine whether there are additional steps you
must take.
Import/export file problem

Problem The program has detected a problem and cannot proceed with
importing or exporting the data.
Solution Decide which error condition applies to your situation. Write down
each error message you receive, so that you have a complete list of
the corrections you need to make in the import or export file.
File access A message indicating that the program cannot access, find, initialize,
create, or open a file, or that the file does not exist or is not a
template, or that a file I/O error has occurred, means that the file is
not available for use.
1. If you are on a network, ask your system administrator whether

you have the correct access rights to the file.
2. Check that you have specified the correct path (drive and
directory), and filename.
3. If you are exporting, go to the system prompt and make sure the
file is not a read-only file. If it is, follow the instructions in your
operating system manual to remove the designation.
4. If you are exporting, check the available file space in the target
directory. If you do not have enough free space, delete or move
unneeded files.
5. Try to import or export the data again.
6. If the message recurs, leave Sage Accpac ERP and Windows,

reset your computer by pressing the Ctrl, Alt, and Del keys
simultaneously, then retry the import or export.

Incorrect procedure
File layout or A message indicating that the file contains incorrect field or
contents
record types, or that data cannot be converted means that the file
layout is not correct, the fields are improperly defined, or the
Error Messages
wrong fields have been selected.
If you are importing and the import file contains errors, go

to the program where you created the import file, then
correct the errors. After you have made the corrections, retry
the import.
Be sure the import file contains all the fields required by the
importing function you are trying to use, and that the correct
file layout is being used. Check each piece of data to be sure
it is formatted and entered as required by the file format you
are using. Make sure the record type is correct. For more
information, read Chapter 12, Importing and Exporting
Data, in this guide.
If you are importing and the wrong fields are selected for
import, reselect the fields, then retry the import.
If you are exporting and the data cannot be converted, the

file is damaged. Follow the instructions for Damaged data,
earlier in this appendix.
File format 7. A message indicating that the file does not have the selected
format, has too many fields or records, has an unexpected end-
of-file, or has an invalid field title means that the file format you
selected is incorrect. To correct this:
Select the correct format for the file.
Try again to import the data.
Incorrect procedure
Problem The task you are trying is not possible or cannot be done until
another step has been completed.
User Guide A7

Insufficient disk space
Network users If you are on a network, this message can indicate that another user
changed or deleted the record you are using after you opened the
record. To protect data integrity, the system does not allow you to
save your changes.
Solution 1. Cancel the current operation.
2. If another procedure must be completed first, do it, then try

again.
3. If another user has changed or deleted the record after you

opened it, your changes cannot be saved. Open the record again
and re-enter your changes.
Insufficient disk space

Problem The disk that contains the company database is full or does not have
enough remaining free space for your task.
Solution 1. If there is any unusual information displayed, make a note of it.

For example, there may be information in the message or
elsewhere in the window giving the number of a batch that was
being created, the steps required to fix problems that may occur
in the data, or the amount of disk space needed for the
operation.
2. Cancel the current operation.
3. Using Windows Explorer or a DOS window, clear some space on

your computer. For example, you may be able to:
Delete files and programs you never use.
Transfer files such as backups of data and current

documents and spreadsheets to diskettes, being sure to label
the diskettes with their contents.
Reduce the amount of detail kept in all of your programs.

For example, you may be able to delete inactive accounts,
clear transaction history and batch status information, post

Insufficient memory
outstanding batches, or clear posting journals to keep from

using more space. To free up disk space, use database
utilities.
Error Messages
4. Take the additional steps that may be required to repair your
data, such as restarting batches that have been partially
processed, or restoring data from backup.
To restart incomplete processes, see Chapter 8, Working

with Restart Records, in the System Manager Administrator
Guide.
To restore data from backup, see Restoring Backup Data,

To prevent the condition from recurring, you should clear

information and delete unneeded files more often. You may also
need to purchase additional disk capacity.
Insufficient memory
Problem There is not enough free memory available for the task you are
trying to do.
Solution 1. Make a note of any information on the screen about steps you
may have to take.
2. Cancel the current operation, close all program windows that do

not need to be open, then try the task again.
If the message does not recur, you have solved the problem, and
you can continue with your work.
If the message reappears, go to the next step.
3. Leave Sage Accpac ERP and Windows. At the system prompt,

use the MEM /C command to tell you how much computer
memory you have available.
User Guide A9

Internal error
4. If you use Pervasive.SQL and the message indicates you cannot

start Pervasive.SQL because of insufficient memory, you need to
free conventional memory (below 1 MB) for Pervasive.SQL. See
your operating system manual for instructions.
5. If your AUTOEXEC.BAT file contains instructions to

automatically start memory-resident programs when you turn
on the machine, you can free up conventional memory by
removing the instructions from the file. When you have finished
editing AUTOEXEC.BAT, reset your computer by pressing the
Ctrl, Alt, and Del keys simultaneously.
To prevent insufficient memory conditions from recurring, you may

need to purchase more memory.
Internal error
Problem There is an internal problem with the software.

technician.
2. Leave Sage Accpac ERP and Windows, then restart and try the
task again.
If the message does not recur, you likely have solved the problem
by restarting. You may want to check your hard disk for errors.
Complete step 3. If your disk does not contain errors, you can
resume normal processing and ignore the balance of these steps.
If the message reappears, go to step 3.
3. Check your hard disk for errors. (Refer to your operating system
manual for instructions to use CHKDSK or SCANDISK.)

Internal error
simultaneously, then start Database Setup. Verify the entries in
the data dictionaries for your databases (both system and
Error Messages
company). Log the errors to an error file. For more information,
see Verifying Databases, in Chapter 4 of the System Manager
Administrator Guide.
guide.
If no errors are reported, the problem may have been solved. Try
the task again. If the error does not recur, you can resume
normal processing. You do not need to read any further.
If errors are reported, go to step 6.
6. Leave Sage Accpac ERP, and locate your copies of the CDs for
the application which has the problem.
If an object name appears in the error message, its two-letter

prefix identifies the application you need to reinstall. For
example, if the object starts with CS or AS, it is a common service
or administrative service, and you need to locate the System
Manager System CDs. If the object name starts with an
accounting application prefix, for example, GL or AR, you need
to locate the applications product CD.
7. Re-install the application in which the error occurred. For

instructions, see either Installing the System Manager, or
Installing Accounting Applications, in Chapter 3 of the System
8. Start Sage Accpac ERP again and retry the operation.
If the message does not recur, reinstalling has solved the problem.
Check the integrity of your data. If there are no errors, you can
resume normal processing.
User Guide A11

Invalid input
If the message reappears, consult a technician.
Invalid input
Problem If you are entering data, you have made an entry the program
cannot accept, or you have left a field blank where an entry is
required.
If you are importing data, a record in the import file contains an

invalid entry.
If you are running a macro, a field in the macro contains an invalid

entry.
Solution Enter the correct information or correct the mistake in the import file
or macro, then retry the operation.
If you are checking data integrity or working in a window where

you cannot correct the problem mentioned in the message, your data
may be damaged and you should follow the Damaged data
instructions, earlier in this appendix.
Invalid Input. Password must be at least X characters long

Your administrator has set the minimum length of passwords (at
least 4, to a maximum of 64). Change your password to reflect the
length noted in the message.
Invalid Input. Password must contain both letters and digits

Password configuration is set by the administrator and must include
at least one letter if the rest are all digits, or one digit if the rest are all
letters. Blanks are not allowed.
Invalid input. Passwords may not be re-used

Users cannot change a password to one used previously.

Operating system limit reached
Invalid input. User ID has been disabled

This message indicates that the system administrator has set the User
Error Messages
ID to the disabled designation, preventing logon. Check with your
system administrator for help.
Invalid input. User ID has been locked out.

The system administrator sets the number of logon attempts
(between 1 and 999) you will be allowed before being locked out. If
you receive this message, you can wait until the lockout has expired
(also set by the administrator, this can be between 1 and 30,000
minutes) or simply ask the administrator for help.
Invalid input. User ID is not authorized to sign on at this time

This message indicates that you can only log on at specified times
and/or days, as set by the administrator. Check with the system
administrator for your logon times.
Invalid input. User password may not be changed

If you receive this message, it means that the system administrator
has set the an option so that you cannot change your password. Ask
the system administrator for help.
Operating system limit reached

Problem There are not enough free file handles or too many locks to open
another file or start another application.

technician.
2. Leave Sage Accpac ERP and Windows, and go to the system

prompt.
User Guide A13

Password change is required
3. Change the number of files and locks as needed for your

database configuration.
If the message indicates that you do not have enough file

handles, increase the value of FILES= in your CONFIG.SYS
file.
If the message indicates that you have too many locks, edit
the SHARE parameters in AUTOEXEC.BAT.
If you are using a Pervasive.SQL database, see

Pervasive.SQL Client Engine Configurations, in
Appendix E of the System Manager Administrator Guide.
4. Reset the computer by pressing the Ctrl, Alt, and Del keys
simultaneously, then start Sage Accpac ERP again and retry the
operation.
If the message does not recur, you have solved the problem by
changing the number of files and locks.
If the message reappears, consult a Sage Accpac ERP technician.
Password change is required

The administrator sets the option for how often users must change
their passwords (between 1 and 999 days). Click OK in the message
to open the Change Password dialog box and change your
password.
Program file problem

Problem Program files are missing, damaged, incompatible, or renamed.

Program file problem
Network users If you are on a network, the message can also mean you do not have
access rights. Ask your system administrator whether you should
follow these instructions and whether you have the correct access
Error Messages
rights.

technician.
task again.
by restarting. Check your data integrity for errors before
resuming. For more information, see Checking Data Integrity,
If the message reappears or the integrity check reports errors, go to

step 3.
3. Locate your copies of the CDs for the application which has the
problem.
If an object name appears in the error message, its two-letter

prefix identifies the application you need to reinstall. For
example, if the object starts with CS or AS, it is a common service
or administrative service, and you need to locate the System
Manager System CDs. If the object name starts with an
accounting application prefix, for example, GL or AR, you need
to locate the applications product CD.
4. Leave Sage Accpac ERP and re-install the application in which

the error occurred. For instructions, see either Installing the
System Manager, or Installing Accounting Applications, in
Chapter 3 of the System Manager Administrator Guide.
If a warning appears saying that the program already exists, use

the List Versions command to make sure it is the same version.
User Guide A15

System error
If the message does not recur, reinstalling has solved the problem.
Check the integrity of your data. If there are no errors, you can
resume normal processing.
System error
Problem An unexpected error has occurred and the system cannot continue.
Memory may be corrupted.
Network users If you are on a network, the message can also mean that there is a
network problem. Ask your system administrator whether you
should follow these instructions and whether you have the correct
access rights.

technician.
task again.
by restarting. You may want to check your hard drive for errors.
Complete step 3. If your disk does not contain errors, you can
resume normal processing and ignore the balance of these steps.
3. Check your hard drive for errors. (Refer to your operating

system manual for instructions to use CHKDSK or SCANDISK.)
4. Reset the computer by pressing the Ctrl, Alt, and Del keys
simultaneously, then start Database Setup and verify the entries
in the data dictionaries for your system and company databases.
Log the errors to an error file. For more information, see

System file problem
Verifying Databases, in Chapter 4 of the System Manager

Error Messages
guide.
If no errors are reported, the problem may have been solved. Try
the task again. If the error does not recur, you can resume
normal processing.
If errors are reported and you cannot fix them, consult a

technician.
System file problem

Problem A System Manager program file is missing or damaged, or contains
an entry that is incompatible with the database.

technician.
2. Leave Sage Accpac ERP and Windows, and go to the system

prompt.
simultaneously, then start Sage Accpac ERP again and retry the
operation.
If the message does not recur, copying the file has likely solved the
problem and you can resume normal processing.
4. If the message indicates that the database driver is not defined,

you need to delete the ORGS.DAT file from your SITE directory,
then start Database Setup and re-enter the database profiles for
your company and system databases. For information, see
User Guide A17

System limit reached
Chapter 4 Setting Up Databases, in the System Manager

If the message does not recur, re-entering the database profiles has
likely solved the problem and you can resume normal
processing.

Problem The maximum value possible for the System Manager has been
reached. Messages are described below.
The macro being recorded has used the available macro file
space.
Problem The macro has exceeded CA-BLEs file size limit. Since you did not
select the Auto Increment option for the macro, the macro has
stopped. You can view the incomplete macro by choosing Edit from
the Macro menu and then selecting the macro name.
Solution To redo the macro, select Start Recording from the Macro menu and
enter a macro name, making sure it ends in two digits. Select the
Auto Increment option, then choose the OK button. If the macro
name is the same as the incomplete macro, choose the Yes button to
overwrite the incomplete macro.
Out of links.
Out of connections.
Solution Cancel the current operation, close all program windows that do not
need to be open, then try the task again.

If the message reappears, leave Sage Accpac ERP and Windows, and
try again.
Error Messages
If the message does not recur, you have solved the problem, and you
can continue with your work.
User Guide A19

Smug54-b.doc, printed on 4/3/2006, at 5:19:13 PM. Last saved on 3/30/2006 4:29:00 PM.
Appendix B
Using a Mouse or Keyboard
Using Function Keys .......................................................... B1

Using Menu Commands and Buttons ........................................... B1
Using
or Keyboard
Learning
Moving Around in Data Entry Forms ........................................... B2
Basics
Working with Columns of Data ................................................. B2
a Mouse
Moving Within Columns ................................................... B2
the
Changing Columns in Data Entry Forms ..................................... B3
Rearranging the Order of Columns ...................................... B3
Hiding Columns ....................................................... B5
Changing the Size of Columns .......................................... B6
User Guide Bi


Appendix B
Using a Mouse or Keyboard
This section contains basic techniques for using Sage Accpac ERP,
and describes how to select options and work with records and
columns of data, using a mouse or a keyboard.
Using a Mouse
or Keyboard
Further For information on switching from window to window, changing
reading
the icon displays, rearranging the company desktop, and selecting
user preferences, see Chapter 3 Learning the Basics, in this guide.
Using Function Keys

The following function or hot keys provide you with shortcuts
when working in Sage Accpac ERP:
Function Icon/
Key Action Button
Display online Help. Available anywhere in Sage Accpac ERP.
Display a Finder window to select records from.
Display the information for a record. (Go button)
Enlarge the selected record to display more information about

the record. (Zoom button)
Using Menu Commands and Buttons

Data entry forms display similar menus (for example, File and Help
menus) thus you need to become familiar with only a few
commands and buttons to work with Sage Accpac ERP data entry
forms.
User Guide B1

Moving Around in Data Entry Forms
Moving Around in Data Entry Forms

Action Button Shortcut Key
Use the New button to start a new record.
Use the Save button to save changes made Alt/S
to the displayed record.
Use the Delete button to delete the Alt/D
displayed record.
Use the navigation buttons to select an Page Up;
earlier or later entry in a list. Page Down;
Ctrl/Page Up;
Ctrl/Page Down
Use the Set Criteria button to specify records Alt/E
to display in the Finder.
Use the Drilldown button to drill down to a
source transaction.
Working with Columns of Data

Some forms display data in columns. You cannot always see all of
the columns in a list, or they might not be in the order you want. Use
the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of a list to view columns that
are not displayed when you open the form. You can also change the
order of columns or hide them, as described in the following
sections.
Moving Within Columns
Use the following keystrokes with columns:
Key Action
Insert Insert a blank row to add a new
record.
Delete Remove the selected row.
Tab or Enter; Go to the next or previous column
Shift+Tab or in a list.
Shift+Enter
or Go up or down one row.
B2 Sage Accpac System Manager

Key Action
or Go right or left one column.
Page Up Go to the top row in view.
Page Down Go to the bottom row in view.
Home Go to the first row in a list.
End Go to the last row in a list.
Changing Columns in Data Entry Forms
Using a Mouse
or Keyboard
You can permanently or temporarily change the order in which
columns appear on many Sage Accpac ERP forms, hide a column,
then restore it, or make columns wider or narrower.
Mouse only You can change columns only with a mouse. There are no keyboard
equivalents for these commands.
In the following examples, we show the Description column in the

A/R Invoice Batch List form as it is moved, widened, hidden, and
then restored.
Rearranging the Order of Columns
You can change the order of columns to match the field order of a
document from which you are entering data.
1. Point the mouse at a column heading.
2. Hold down the left mouse button.
3. Move the column to its new location.
User Guide B3

As you drag the column to its new position, a copy of the

heading appears as a shaded heading following the movement
of your mouse, as shown below:
4. Release the left mouse button when the column is in the desired
location.
The columns will be in the new order the next time you open the
form.
After closing the form, you can reset the columns to the original
settings by right-clicking the icon for the form, choosing Restore
Defaults from the menu that appears, and then choosing the option,
All Other Settings. (You can also open the Restore Defaults dialog
box by choosing Restore Defaults in the Options menu on the Sage
Accpac ERP desktop menu bar.)

Hiding Columns
To hide a column, right-click on the column heading, then choose

Hide (column name).
Using a Mouse
or Keyboard
The following shows the A/R Invoice Batch List form with the
Description column hidden.
Description
column hidden
User Guide B5

To display the column again, right-click anywhere in the column

headings area, then choose Restore (column name), from the menu
that appears, as shown next.
Changing the Size of Columns
You can make columns wider or narrower by following these steps:
1. Position the mouse pointer on the vertical line separating a

column heading from the next heading to the right.
Column The mouse pointer changes to a column width symbol, which

width symbol
you then drag to the right, or to the left.
2. Drag the column to the right (to make the column wider) or to
the left (to make it narrower). The Description column below has
been widened.

3. When the column reaches the width you prefer, release the
mouse button.
Resize to minimum 4. To resize a column to its minimum size (based on the width of
size
data in the column), double-click on the vertical line dividing
columns. The column to the left will be resized.
Using a Mouse
or Keyboard
User Guide B7

Smug54-inx.doc, printed on 4/25/2006, at 2:33:48 PM. Last saved on 4/25/2006 2:33:00 PM.
Index
A
B
Access file
import/export, 121 Backing up
Accounting applications before running a macro, 1319
starting, 210 Batch view
Active date, 156 defined, 1310
ActiveApplications property BlkPut method
of accpacSession, 1484 of accpacView, 1490
Add/Save button, 155 BranchCode property
Adding a macro icon for another program, of accpacCompany, 1417
1323 Browse
Index
Adding a macro to a folder, 1320 filter expressions, 1315
Adding a non-Sage Accpac program to a browser
folder, 1320 warning messages, 25
Adding macro icons, 57, 1322
Adding Web sites to My Tasks pane, 220
address bar C
enter URL, 25
Address properties CA-BLE macros. See: Macros
of accpacCompany, 1417 Calculator
All assigned schedules, 157 using from data entry field, 35
All personal schedules, 157 City property
AND of accpacCompany, 1417
selection criteria, 1317 Collection, in Visual Basic macros
Assign UI Profiles report, 1011 defined, 148
Attributes property Collections
of accpacViewField, 1444, 1449, 14-106 accpacActiveApplications, 14108
Automated process server, 105 accpacErrors, 14110
accpacKeys, 14122
accpacViewCompositeNames, 14117
accpacViewFieldPresentationStrings,
14118
accpacViewFields, 14120
User Guide Index1

Columns Country property

hiding, B5 of accpacCompany, 1417
Common Services CountryCode property
optional fields setup, 92 of accpacCompany, 1417
Common Services reports Creating macros, 134
Company Profile, 1012 Creating optional fields, 92
Currency Codes, 1012 Criteria
Currency Rate Types, 1013 clearing by restoring defaults, 411
Currency Rates, 1013 clearing for item, 512
Euro Conversion Rates, 1013 selecting, 47
Fiscal Calendar, 1012 Crystal Info
Schedules, 1013 password, 105
Company user name, 105
changing in Web desktop, 222 CSV file
changing on desktop, 222 import/export, 121
displayed at sign-on, 22 Currencies
Company profile, 62 deleting, 85
changing, 61 Currency codes
Company Profile report, 1012 EUR, 83
Company property Currency Codes report, 1012
of accpacSession, 1485 Currency conversion
Composite view process, 812
described, 138 Currency rate types
Constant, in Visual Basic macros adding, 86
defined, 148 Currency Rate Types report, 1013
Contact property Currency rates
of accpacCompany, 1417 updating
Content pane Getrate.xls macro, 1412
alerts and notifications, 219 Currency Rates report, 1013
comments and feedback, 219 Customization Directories report, 1011
news and announcements, 219
tips and techniques, 219
training and support, 219 D
using, 218
Converting currency Data damage
entering rates and dates, 88 reasons for, 111
Count property
DataLevel property
of accpacActiveApplications, 14110
of accpacApplication, 1415
of accpacErrors, 14114, 14117
Date matching
of accpacKeys, 14123
exact, 811
of accpacViewCompositeNames, 14118
Index2 Sage Accpac System Manager

DateMatch property Error message (continued)

of accpacCurrencyRate, 1422 Incorrect procedure, A7
of accpacCurrencyTable, 1423 Insufficient disk space, A8
Decimals property Insufficient memory, A9
of accpacCurrency, 1420 Internal error, A10
DecimalSep property invalid input
of accpacCurrency, 1420 cannot change password, A13
Default properties cannot reuse password, A13
restoring, 512 password configuration, A12
Delete button, 155 password wrong length, A12
Deleting folder, 510 unauthorized user ID, A13
Description property user ID disabled, A13
of accpacCurrency, 1420 user ID locked out, A13
of accpacCurrencyTable, 1423 macro incomplete, A18
of accpacError, 1431 operating system limit reached, A14
of accpacViewField, 14106 out of links/out of connections, A19
Desktop password change required, A14
customizing, 51 program file problem, A15
Detail view system error, A16
defined, 1310 system file problem, A17
Index
Details button, 155 system limit reached, A18
digitally-signed macros, 1319 Errors property
Dirty property of accpacSession, 1485
of accpacView, 14101 EUR, 83
Download Euro conversion rates, 813
Web Session Manager, 25 viewing, 814
Due assigned schedules, 157 Euro Conversion Rates report, 1013
Due personal schedules, 156 European Monetary Union, 83
Excel 2000
import/export, 121
E Excel 5.0
import/export, 121
Editing macros, 1324 Exists property
E-mail of accpacView, 14101
as print destination, 102 Exporting
EMU, 813 steps, 126
Error handling
in Visual Basic macros, 147
Error message F
Criteria error, A1
Damaged data, A2 Fax property
import/export file problem, A6 of accpacCompany, 1417
User Guide Index3

Fields G
macro recording, 136
Fields property Get Info, 1327
of accpacKey, 14108 Getrate.xls macro, 1412
of accpacView, 14101
File
as print destination, 102
H
File formats
import/export, 121
Help tabs, 27
Filter
HomeCurrency property
defined for macros, 1315
of accpacCompany, 1417
Finder
HomeCurrencyCode property
clearing criteria, 411
of accpacCurrencyRate, 1422
narrowing data displayed, 44
Hot keys. See Function keys
selecting records, 42
setting criteria, 47
starting automatically, 412
starting first, 511 I
using criteria, 42, 44
Fiscal calendar Icon
described, 71 changing display, 32
Fiscal Calendar report, 1012 copying to another folder, 59
FiscalPeriods property selecting for new folder, 53
of accpacCompany, 1417 Import/export
Flat view Access, 121
defined, 139 CSV, 121
Folder Excel 2000, 121
copying to, 59 Excel 5.0, 121
creating, 51 Importing
customizing, 51 steps, 123
deleting, 510 Integrity check
Folder properties company data errors, 113
changing, 510 error handling, 113
FourPeriodQuarter property shared data errors, 113
of accpacCompany, 1417 system data errors, 113
Frequency, 153 Internet Explorer
Function keys, B1 Sage Accpac server URL, 25
Functional currency, 82 Item method
company, 62 of accpacKeys, 1450, 1451, 1452,
14-53, 14122
Item settings
clearing, 512

K Macros (continued)
default directory, 135
Key fields defined, 131
macro recording, 136 digitally-signed, 1319
Keyboard editing, 1324
using with Sage Accpac ERP. filter expressions, 1315
Appendix D overview, 131
Keys. See names of individual keys running, 1319
Keys property sample, 1320
of accpacView, 14101 using U.I. Info, 1326
view classes, 139
viewing objects, 1325
writing, 136
L
Methods, in Visual Basic macros
defined, 148
Last Run Date, 158
Mouse
LocationCode property
using with Sage Accpac ERP.
Appendix D
LocationType property
Multicurrency, 81
company, 62
Index
default rate types, 87
My Tasks pane
M adding items to new group, 216
adding Web sites, 220
Macro creating a group, 216
adding to folder, 53 moving and deleting groups, 218
Macro File field moving and deleting tasks, 218
in macro recording, 135 using, 216
Macro icons
adding to desktop, 1322
Macro security, 131, 132 N
high, 133
levels, 132
Name property
low, 133
medium, 133
of accpacKey, 14108
Macros. See also: CA-BLE Macros, Visual
of accpacReport, 1454
Basic Macros
of accpacViewField, 14106, 14120,
adding icons, 1322
14-121, 14122
adding icons for other programs, 1323
NegativeDisplay property
composite views, 138
of accpacCurrency, 1421
creating, 134
New folder
creating, 51
User Guide Index5

No user, 153 P
Page size
O A4 option, 104
report option, 104
Object hierarchy, 144 Paper size
Object Model, Sage Accpac ERP, 143 report option, 104
Objects Parameters, in Visual Basic macros
in Visual Basic macros, 148 defined, 148
Sage Accpac. See: Sage Accpac objects, Password
See: Sage Accpac objects changing, 223
Optional fields PgmID property
entering values, 94 of accpacApplication, 1416
modifying, 94 of accpacView, 14101, 14102
product description, 91 PgmVer property
types, 92 of accpacApplication, 1416
amount, 93 Phone property
date, 93 of accpacCompany, 1418
integer, 93 PhoneFormat property
number, 93 of accpacCompany, 1418
text, 92 PostCode property
time, 93 of accpacCompany, 1418
yes/no, 93 Precision property
validate of accpacViewField, 14107
allow blank, 94 PresentationMask property
validate option, 93 of accpacViewField, 14107
Optional tables PresentationStrings property
adding, 96 of accpacViewField, 14107
assigning security, 96 PresentationType property
deleting, 97 of accpacViewField, 14107
Optional tables in older versions of Sage Preview
Accpac ERP, 94 as print destination, 101
OR Print destination
selection criteria, 1317 E-mail, 102
Order property File, 102
of accpacView, 14101 list, 101
Ordered view Preview, 101
defined, 1310 Printer, 101
schedule, 105
Schedule, 102

Print destination (continued) RateType property

schedule, and initiating workstation, of accpacCompany, 1418
10-5 of accpacCurrencyRate, 1422
selecting, 101 Record Mode fields
Print setup in macro recording, 135
clearing options, 512 Recording macros
Print/Page setup steps, 135
for specific report, 109 tips, 134
standard, 108 Records
PrintDestination property macro recording, 136
of accpacReport, 1454 Recurring periods, 153
Printer daily, 153
for specific report, 108 monthly, 154
selecting at print time, 109 semi-monthly, 154
selection choices, 106 weekly, 154
single report, 109 yearly, 154
Printing Recurring transactions
scheduling, 106 attaching to schedule, 155
Program details, 155
starting second window, 511 processing from Reminder List, 158
Index
Program structure Relational operators
when using Sage Accpac objects, 145 selection criteria, 1317
Properties Remind field, 152
undoing customization, 512 Reminder, 151
Properties, in Visual Basic macros before run date, 153
defined, 148 Reminder List
Publishing format, 106 all assigned schedules, 157
all personal schedules, 157
due assigned schedules, 157
R due personal schedules, 156
last run date column, 157
Rate date list field, 156
entering, 812 process button, 158
Rate property process from, 158
of accpacCurrencyRate, 1422 processed column, 157
RateDate property remind column, 157
of accpacCurrencyRate, 1422 run date column, 157
RateOperator property schedule button, 157
of accpacCurrencyRate, 1422 schedule code/description, 157
of accpacCurrencyTable, 1423 Report definitions
xxRPT.INI, 1318
User Guide Index7

Reports Sage desktop, 212

Administrative Services, 1011 Content pane, 212
Assign UI Profiles, 1011 Get Started, 214
Common Services, 1012 Information Center, 214
Company Profile, 1012 moving around, 213
Currency Codes, 1012 My Tasks pane, 212, 216
Currency Rate Types, 1013 repositioning panes, 213
Currency Rates, 1013 Tasks pane, 212, 214
Customization Directories, 1011 Sage Desktop
Euro Conversion Rates, 1013 changing home page, 219
Fiscal Calendar, 1012 Schedule
Restart Maintenance, 1011 as print destination, 102
Schedules, 1013 Crystal Info, 102
Security Groups, 1011 as print destination, 105
UI Profile Maintenance, 1011 icon, 151
User Authorizations, 1012 Schedules
Users, 1012 attach transactions, 155
using accpacReport object, 1449 codes, 151
Restart Maintenance report, 1011 creating, 151
Restoring data Schedules report, 1013
steps, 114 Search criteria
Running macros, 1319 defined, 44
setting up, 47
Security Groups report, 1011
S Security property
Sage Accpac Object Model, 143 Selection criteria
Sage Accpac objects AND, OR, 1317
accpacApplication, 1415 Browse, 1315
accpacCompany, 1416 relational operators, 1317
accpacCurrency, 1418 Selector property
accpacCurrencyRate, 1421 of accpacApplication, 1416
accpacCurrencyTable, 1422 Sequence property
accpacKey, 14108 of accpacApplication, 1416
accpacReport, 1449 Sequenced view
accpacSession, 1455 defined, 1310
accpacView, 1489 Session date
accpacViewField, 14103 displayed at sign-on, 22
error handling, 147 Session, using accpacSession object
using in a Visual Basic program, 144 creating, 145, 149, 1456
Sage Accpac server opening, 145
URL, 25

SessionWarnDays property Type property

of accpacCompany, 1418 of accpacView, 14102
Set view of accpacViewField, 14107
defined, 1310
Setting macro security, 132
Signon U
from desktop, 22
from Web, 24 U.I. Info, 1326
Sign-on UI Profile Maintenance report, 1011
from desktop, 22 Undoing properties, 512
Size property User Authorizations report, 1012
of accpacViewField, 14107 User ID
SourceCurrencyCode property displayed at sign-on, 22
of accpacCurrencyRate, 1422 entering, 22
SourceOfRates property Users report, 1012
of accpacCurrencyTable, 1423 Using function keys, B1
Specific user, 152
Spread property
of accpacCurrencyRate, 1422
V
State property
Index
Value property
SubviewNames property
of accpacViewField, 14108
Verify method
Super view
defined, 1310
View (accpacView) methods
Symbol property
BlkPut, 1490
Verify, 14100
SymbolDisplay property
View classes
defined, 139
Syntax
ViewName property
selection criteria, 1315
of accpacViewField, 14108
Views
using accpacView object, 1489
T Visual Basic macros. See also: Macros
examples, 148
Tasks pane using Sage Accpac objects, 141
Get Started, 214
Information Center, 214
using, 214
ThousandsSep property
User Guide Index9

warning messages
Sage Accpac in browser, 25
Web
welcome screen, 27
Web desktop, 29, 211
Web Link type, 220
Web Page type, 219
Web Session Manager
download, 25
Web signon, 24
Wildcards
relational operators, 1317
Writing macros, 136

Accpac - Guide - Manual For SM User Guide PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Accpac - Guide - Manual For SM User Guide PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

.

Sage Accpac ERP

Sage Accpac International, Inc. Confidential

Sage Accpac International, Inc. Confidential

Sage Accpac International, Inc.

Sage Accpac International, Inc.

Sage Accpac International, Inc.

Sage Accpac International, Inc.

Chapter 1 Introducing the User Guide

Chapter 2: Starting Sage Accpac ERP

User Guide iii

ACCPAC INTERNATIONAL Confidential

Chapter 3: Learning the Basics

iv Sage Accpac System Manager

ACCPAC INTERNATIONAL Confidential

Chapter 5: Customizing Your Desktop

Chapter 6: Editing the Company Profile

Chapter 7: Using the Fiscal Calendar

Chapter 8: Entering Currency Information

ACCPAC INTERNATIONAL Confidential

Entering Currency Rates and Tables ............................................. 87

Chapter 9: Setting Up Optional Fields

Chapter 10: Printing

vi Sage Accpac System Manager

ACCPAC INTERNATIONAL Confidential

Currency Rates ...........................................................1010

Chapter 11: Checking Data Integrity and Making

Chapter 12: Importing and Exporting Data

User Guide vii

ACCPAC INTERNATIONAL Confidential

Chapter 13: Using Macros

Chapter 14: Writing Visual Basic Macros

viii Sage Accpac System Manager

ACCPAC INTERNATIONAL Confidential

Chapter 15: Scheduling Recurring Transactions

Appendix A: Error Messages

ACCPAC INTERNATIONAL Confidential

Insufficient disk space ..........................................................A8

Appendix B: Using a Mouse or Keyboard

x Sage Accpac System Manager

ACCPAC INTERNATIONAL Confidential

the User Guide

How to Use This Manual

Chapter 2, Starting Sage Accpac ERP, explains how to sign on,

Chapter 3, Learning the Basics, describes techniques for using

Chapter 5, Customizing Your Desktop, explains how to create

Chapter 6, Editing the Company Profile, describes changes you

Chapter 7, Using the Fiscal Calendar, describes the fiscal calendar

Chapter 8, Entering Currency Information, describes the currency

Sage Accpac International, Inc. Confidential

How to Use This Manual

Chapter 9, Setting Up Optional Fields, gives instructions for

Chapter 10, Printing, gives instructions for printing, and provides

Chapter 11, Checking Data Integrity and Making Backups,

Chapter 12, Importing and Exporting Data, explains how to

Chapter 13, Using Macros, provides an overview of Visual Basic

Chapter 14, Writing Visual Basic Macros, describes the Sage

Chapter 15, Scheduling Recurring Transactions, gives

Appendix A, Error Messages, provides instructions for recovering

Appendix B, Using a Mouse or Keyboard, describes techniques

The Index contains an alphabetical listing of topics in the System

12 Sage Accpac System Manager

Sage Accpac International, Inc. Confidential